Aztec Api++ Manuel in English

Machine Translated by Google
Aztec Informatica®
API++
Plateaus, plinths, gratings

API++ FULL - Plates, plinths and grates
Copyright © 2000, 2023 Aztec Informatica srl

All rights reserved.
Any technical documents that are made available by Aztec Informatica were created by
Aztec Informatica which owns the Copyright and is the property of Aztec Informatica. There
technical documentation is provided as is, and Aztec Informatica makes no warranty as to the accuracy or use of
such information. The user assumes the risk of using the
technical documentation or information contained therein. The documentation could
contain technical or other inaccuracies or typographical errors. Aztec Informatica reserves the right
the right to make changes without notice.
The information contained in this manual does not represent a commitment on the part of
Aztec Informatica. The software described in this document is provided with the Agreement
User license. The software itself can only be used in accordance with the contract itself.
For no reason whatsoever may any part of this manual be reproduced in any form and/or
medium without the written consent of Aztec Informatica. Unless otherwise specified, each
reference to companies, names, data and addresses used in screen shots and
examples is purely coincidental and has the sole purpose of illustrating the use of the Aztec Informatica product.
WINDOWS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
Other brand names and product names are trademarks registered or registered by their respective owners
USER MANUAL
1 Premise ................................................. .................................................. ........................ 1

2 Installing software from DVD................................................................. ...................................... 4
3 API program working environment................................................................ ................................ 5

3.1 Environment ................. .................................................. .................................................. ... 5 3.2
Changing the background color .......................................... .................................................. 5 3.3
Activate the help system .......................................................... .................................................. 5 3.4
Command bar ................................................ .................................................. ............ 5
4 File Menu................................................. .................................................. .......................... 7
4.1 New................................................. .................................................. .......................... 7
4.2 Open................................................ .................................................. ................................ 7 4.3
Save ................ .................................................. .................................................. .......... 7
4.4 Import ................................................ .................................................. ........................... 8 Import
4.4.1 text file................................. .................................................. ........................... 9 4.5 File
reading options .................... .................................................. .................................. 11 4.6
Exit............. .................................................. .................................................. .............. 11
5 Conventions ................................................ .................................................. .................. 11
5.1 Loads ................................................ .................................................. ....................... 11
5.2 Stresses ................................................ .................................................. .............. 11
6 Data Menu ................................................. .................................................. ........................ 13 6.1
General Data ...................... .................................................. .......................................... 13 6.2
Type....... .................................................. .................................................. ............ 13 6.3
Regulations................................... .................................................. ................................ 14 6.4
Materials................. .................................................. .................................................. ..... 15 6.4.1
Material definition .......................................... .................................................. 16 6.4.1.1 Steel
material definition window ................................................ ................ 17 6.5
Land................................. .................................................. ........................................... 17 Terrain
6.5.1 characteristics window ..... .................................................. ................... 18
6.6 Stratigraphy................................................ .................................................. .................. 20 6.7
Roof ................................. .................................................. ............................................ 22
6.8 Beam types................................................................. .................................................. .............. 23
6.8.1 Definition of beam typology................................ .................................................. 23
6.8.1.1 Beam reinforcement options ........................................... .......................................... 25
6.9 Plinth types .... .................................................. .................................................. ...... 27 6.9.1 Plinth
geometry................................................ .................................................. ......... 27 6.9.1.1 Plinth
reinforcement options.................................. ................................................ 29 6.10 Pole
types ................................................ .................................................. .............. 30 6.10.1 Definition of
pole typology.................................. .................................................. .... 30 6.10.1.1 Pole
reinforcements .......................................... .................................................. ..... 31 6.11 Types
of glasses .......................................... .................................................. ............. 31 6.11.1 Definition of
glass typology ................................ ............................................. 32 6.11.1.1 Armour
glass................................................. ...................................... 33
6.12 Units of measurement ................................................ .................................................. ............. 33
7 Geometry Menu ................................................. .................................................. ............. 35 7.1
Structure size................................................ .................................................. .................... 35
Aztec Informatica srl

Corso Umberto, 43 – 87059 Casali del Manco – Loc. Casole Bruzio (CS) - tel/fax (0984) 432617 ra
II
7.2 Plate ................................................ .................................................. ........................ 36

7.3 List of Plinths ................................................. .................................................. ................ 36
7.3.1 Insert/Modify plinth................................................................ .................................. 37
7.4 List of Beams ................................................. .................................................. ................ 38
7.4.1 Insert/Modify beam................................................................ ...................................... 38
7.4.1.1 Changing beam length................................................................ .................................. 39
7.5 List of Poles ................................................. .................................................. ................. 40
7.5.1.1 Pole definition ................................................ ................................................ 42
7.6 List of Pillars ................................................. .................................................. ............. 42
7.6.1 Pillar definition ................................................................ ............................................ 43
7.7 List of Thicknesses ................................................. .................................................. .......... 44
7.7.1 Thickness definition ................................................................ ...................................... 44
7.8 Winkler's Constant List........................................................ ................................................ 45
7.8.1 Winkler Constant Definition................................................................ .......................... 46
7.9 Specific constraints................................................................. .................................................. ............ 47
7.9.1 Nodal constraint definition................................................................. .................................. 47
7.10 Continuous constraints ................................................ .................................................. ............ 48
7.10.1 Line constraint definition .......................................................... .................................... 48
7.11 Structure information ................................................ .................................................. .. 49
8 Graphic input ................................................ .................................................. ................. 50

8.1 Menu and command bar Phases ................................................ ...................................... 50
8.2 Insert/Edit menu and command bar................................................................ ................ 50
8.3 Menu and tool command bar ................................................................ ................................ 52
8.4 Pop-up menu........................................................ .................................................. ................. 53
8.5 Definition of the audience contour ................................................ ........................................... 53
8.5.1 Contour graphic input ................................................................ .......................................... 53
8.5.2 Numeric input management and modification of plate coordinates ................................. 54
8.5.3 Automatic generation of the audience contour................................................................ ............ 54
8.6 Definition of plinths................................................. .................................................. .......... 55
8.6.1 Plinth graphic input................................................................ ................................................ 55
8.6.2 Automatic plinth generation ................................................. ............................ 55
8.6.3 Manipulate plinths................................................ .................................................. .. 56
8.7 Definition of punctual constraints................................................................ ................................................. 56
8.7.1 Punctual constraints graphic input ................................................................ ................................ 56
8.7.2 Automatic generation of point constraints................................................................ ............. 56
8.8 Definition of continuous constraints................................................................ ................................................. 57
8.8.1 Continuous constraints graph input ................................................................ ................................ 57
8.9 Definition of thicknesses................................................. .................................................. .... 58
8.9.1 Thickness graphic input................................................................. .......................................... 58
8.10 Winkler constant definition................................................................ ...................................... 58
8.10.1 Winkler constant graphical input ................................................ ............................. 58
8.11 Definition of piles........................................................ .................................................. ............ 59
8.11.1 Pile graphic input ................................................ .................................................. .. 59
8.11.2 Automatic pile generation................................................................ ................................. 59
8.12 Definition of pillars................................................................ .................................................. ....... 60
8.12.1 Column graphic input................................................................ ................................................ 60
8.12.2 Automatic generation of pillars ................................................ ............................ 60
8.12.3 Manipulate pillars................................................ .................................................. .. 61
8.13 Definition of beams ................................................. .................................................. .......... 62
8.13.1 Beam graphic input ................................................ .................................................. 62
8.13.2 Automatic beam generation................................................................ ................................ 62
8.14 Grid and snap definition................................................................ ................................................ 63

8.15 Viewing options........................................................................ ................................................ 63
9 Loads Menu................................................................ .................................................. ................... 64

9.1 Distributed loads........................................................ .................................................. ......... 64
9.2 Concentrated loads ................................................. .................................................. ...... 66
9.3 Load lines ................................................................ .................................................. .............. 68
9.4 Pillar loads................................................................. .................................................. .............. 70 9.5 Beam linear
loads ................................ .................................................. .................... 71
9.6 Importing loads......................................................... .................................................. .... 73 9.7 Load
conditions ................................................ .................................................. ........... 73 Load condition
9.7.1 specifications................................................ .......................................... 74 9.8 Load
combinations ..... .................................................. .......................................... 75 Generation
9.8.1 options..... .................................................. .................................... 76 9.9 List of
combinations ........... .................................................. ...................................... 80
9.10 Combination details................................................................ .................................................. .. 81
10 Load graphic input ................................................ .................................................. ........ 82 10.1 Menu and command
bar Phases ................................. ................................................. 82 10.2 Insert / Edit menu and command
bar................................................................ .............. 82 10.3 Tools menu and command
bar ................................ ................................................ 83 10.4 Menu pop-
ups ................................................ .................................................. ............... 84 10.5 Definition of distributed
loads................................ .................................................. ......... 85 10.5.1 Distributed load graphic
input ................................. ........................................... 85 10.5.2 Distributed load
generation .................................................. ........................... 85 10.6 Definition of concentrated
loads .................... .................................................. ............... 86 10.6.1 Concentrated load graphic
input................................. ................................................ 86 10.6.2 Concentrated load
generation ................................................................. ........................... 87 10.7 Definition of Load
Line .................... .................................................. ...................... 88 Load line graphic
10.7.1 input ...................... .................................................. ........ 88 10.8 Definition of pillar
loads................................................. .................................................. ...... 90 Column load graphic
10.8.1 input................................................. ........................................... 90 10.9 Definition of beam distributed
load ... .................................................. .......................... 91 Beam distributed load graphic
10.9.1 input ................................. ................................................. 91 10.10 Plinth load
definition ................................................................ ................................................. 93 10.10.1 Plinth load graphic
input................................................................ .......................................... 93
11 Model Menu ................................................. .................................................. ................. 94
11.1 Data check ................................................. .................................................. ................... 94
11.2 Plate model options................................................................ .................................................. .. 94 11.3 Mesh
generation options ................................................ ................................................ 95 11.4 Check
mesh ................................................ .................................................. .............. 96
12 Model Graphics ................................................ .................................................. .............. 97 12.1 Menu and command

bar Phases ................................ .................................................. ..... 98 12.2 Insert/Edit menu and command
bar................................................ ...................... 98 12.3 Tool menu and command
bar .................................. .................................................. ... 100 12.4 Pop-up
menu .......................................... .................................................. ................... 100
13 Analysis Menu ................................................. .................................................. ................. 101
13.1 Lift options ................................................................ .................................................. ....... 101 13.1.1 Calculation

options for mixed foundation ................................. ........................... 102 13.2 Plate/lattice analysis
options ................. .................................................. ............. 102 13.3 Plinth analysis
options ................................ .................................................. ................. 105

IV
13.4 Interaction analysis options ................................................ ........................................... 107 13.5 Settlement

analysis options .. .................................................. ....................................... 109 13.6 Pile analysis
options ...... .................................................. ............................................. 109 13.6.1 Definition vertical pressure
trend................................................................. ...... 112 13.6.2 Definition of limit
pressure................................................. .......................................... 114 13.7 Earthquake
Options...... .................................................. .................................................. .. 115 Seismic coefficients DM 88 + DM
13.7.1 96................................................ .................... 116
14 Armor Menu................................................................. .................................................. ............. 117 14.1 Plate

reinforcement options.................................... .................................................. .......... 117 14.2 Plinth reinforcement
options ................................... .................................................. .......... 120 14.3 Beam reinforcement
options................................................ .................................................. ........... 120 14.4 Pile reinforcement
specifications ................................. .................................................. ........ 121 14.5 Glass reinforcement
options ................................................ .................................................. .. 121 14.6 ULS check
options .......................................................... .................................................. ... 122 14.7 SLE check
options................................................ .................................................. ..... 123 14.8 Arrange
armor................................................. .................................................. ............. 124 14.9 Reinforcement design /
verification................................. .................................................. ....... 124
15 Results Menu................................................................ .................................................. ............... 125
15.1 Global results................................................................ .................................................. .......... 125 Overall

15.1.1 results ........................................... .................................................. 127 15.2 Plate
results ................................................ .................................................. ........... 127 15.3 Plinth
results................................... .................................................. ........................... 129 15.4 Geotechnical results of the
plinths.................... .................................................. ...................... 131 15.5 Beam
results........................ .................................................. .................................... 132 15.6 Pile
results......... .................................................. .................................................. ... 134 15.6.1 Geotechnical

checks ........................................... ............................................. 134 15.6.2 Details
results ................................................. ................................................ 135 15.7 Results
glasses ................................................. .................................................. ..... 137 15.8 Movement
results................................................ .................................................. ....... 139 15.9 Constraint

reactions................................................ .................................................. .............. 140 15.10 Cracking
results................................ .................................................. ............... 140 15.11 Punching
results ................................. .................................................. ............ 142
16 Results graphics................................................. .................................................. ............. 144
16.1 Object selection ................................................. .................................................. ...... 144 16.2 Menu and
command bar Views ................................... ............................................ 144
16.3 Menu and tool command bar ................................................................ ................................ 145
16.4 Pop-up menu................................................. .................................................. ............... 145 The visible menu

items depend on the drawing currently displayed.................... 146 16.5 Stratigraphy
View. .................................................. .................................... 146 16.6 Viewing Pile
Results........ .................................................. ............................ 146 16.6.1 Pile diagram
settings .................. .................................................. ........... 149 16.6.2 Modifying pile
reinforcement ................................ .................................................. .. 150 16.6.3 Pole
information .......................................... .................................................. 150 16.6.4 Pole engagement diagram
display options ........................................... . 151 16.7 Viewing failure
results................................................................ ................................ 151 16.8 Viewing Movement
Results................. .................................................. ......... 154 16.9 Displaying bending and shear stresses/membrane
stresses ................ 155 16.10 Displaying required reinforcements ........ .................................................. ..................
156 16.11 Viewing commitment ................................ .................................................. ............. 157 16.11.1 Commitment
query................................................. .................................................. .. 158

16.12 Viewing beam stresses ................................................................ ................................ 159 16.12.1 Detail of

beam stresses ................. .................................................. ............... 160 16.13 Viewing beam
reinforcements ................................. .................................................. ... 160 16.13.1 List of beam
rods................................................ .................................................. .... 162 16.13.2 Inserting beam
iron................................................ ................................................ 163 16.13.3 Modify beam
iron ................................................. ........................................... 163 16.13.4 Modifying beam
brackets .................................................. ....................................... 164 16.13.5 Odds
options..... .................................................. ................................................. 164 16.14 Plate reinforcement display /
plinths................................................ .................... 165 16.14.1 Inserting
iron........................ .................................................. .................... 167 16.14.2 Editing
iron ........................... .................................................. ........................... 168 16.14.3 List of plate/plinth irons no.
… ............. .................................................. ......... 168 16.14.4 Reinforcement graphics
options .................................. ............................................. 169 16.14.5 Options armor
design................................................................ ................................ 170 16.14.6 Detail of structural
checks ........... .................................................. ............... 170 16.14.7 Detail of glass
reinforcement ................................ ................................................. 171 16.15 Graphic
layout ................................................................ .................................................. 173 16.15.1 Layout
options................................................. ............................................ 174 16.16 Inserting
captions .. .................................................. ........................................... 175 16.17 List of
captions ... .................................................. .................................................. 175 16.18 View
options................................................................ ................................................ 176 16.19 Odds

Options ................................................ .................................................. ........... 177
17 3D graphics ................................................. .................................................. .................... 178
18 Report Menu ................................................. .................................................. ............ 179 18.1 Generate

report................................................ .................................................. .................... 179 18.1.1 Relationship combination
options ........................... ................................................ 180 18.2 Materials
calculation ................................................................. ................................................. 180
19 Window Menu ................................................. .................................................. ............... 181
20 Help Menu ................................................. .................................................. .................... 181
21 Finite element method................................................................ ............................................. 183 21.1 Bilinear

quadrilateral element .................................................. ................................ 186 21.2 Higher order
elements ................. .................................................. ....................... 188 21.2.1 8-node
quadrilateral .................... .................................................. ................ 188 21.3 Triangular
elements ................................ .................................................. .................... 189 21.3.1 Triangular element with 3
nodes......................... .................................................. ... 189 21.3.2 6-node triangular
element................................................ .................................... 190 21.4 Plate
elements .......... .................................................. ............................................. 190 21.4.1 Plate by
Kirchhoff................................................ ........................................... 191 21.4.2 Mindlin plate (elements with shear
deformability) ................................. 193 21.4.3 DKT (Discrete Kirchoff Triangle) element and DKQ element
(Discrete Kirchoff Quadrilateral)................................................. .................................................. ....................... 193
21.4.4 DKMT element (Discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin Triangle) and DKMQ element (Discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin
Quadrilateral) .... .................................................. ................. 194
22 The beam element............................................. .................................................. ............. 202 22.1 Stiffness matrix -
Bernoulli beam................................ ........................................... 204 22.2 The elements used in the API++
program. .................................................. ........... 207
23 Mesh Generation................................................................. .................................................. ........ 209
23.1 Structured triangular mesh generator................................................................ ...................... 209

YOU
23.2 Unstructured triangular mesh generator................................................................ ................. 211 23.3 Classic mesh
generator ................................ .................................................. ........... 212 23.4 Polygon mesh
generator................................................. .................................................. .. 213
24 Modeling the foundation plate................................................................ ................... 215 24.1 The interaction

model ........................... .................................................. ................. 216
25 Calculation of voltages ................................................ .................................................. ... 220 25.1 Boussinesq
theory .......................................... .................................................. ..... 220 25.2 Frohlich

theory .......................................... .................................................. ............. 221 25.3 Westergaard
theory ................................ .................................................. ............. 221
26 Calculation of settlements ................................................ .................................................. ... 223

26.1 Oedometric method................................................................ .................................................. ... 224
26.2 Elastic Method ................................................. .................................................. ........ 225
27 Limit load of shallow foundations ................................................. ................................ 226 27.1 Terzaghi

method ................. .................................................. .................................... 228 27.2 Meyerhof
method .......... .................................................. ....................................... 228 27.3 Hansen's
method...... .................................................. ................................................ 229 27.4 Method of
Vesic ................................................ .................................................. ...... 231 27.5 Formula Cascone
(2006) ................................... .................................................. .... 233 27.6 Bearing capacity in the presence of
aquifer .......................................... ................................ 234
28 Limit load of foundation piles ................................................ ....................................... 236 28.1 Determination of load-
bearing capacity ..... .................................................. ............. 236 28.2 Peak load-bearing
capacity................................................ .................................................. ........ 237 28.3 Calculation of the coefficients Nc
and Nq ................................. ............................................. 238 28.3.1
Terzaghi .................................................. .................................................. ....... 238 28.3.2
Meyerhof................................................ .................................................. .................. 238 28.3.3
Hansen................................. .................................................. ................................ 239 28.3.4
Vesic ............. .................................................. ................................................. 239 28.3.5
Berezantzev................................................ .................................................. ..... 240 28.3.6 Berezantzev
reduced................................................ .................................................. .240
28.4 Bearing capacity according to Bustamante – Doix (micropiles) .......................................... 241 28.5 Bearing
capacity for lateral resistance ................................................................ ..................... 245 28.6 Bearing capacity for
horizontal loads........................ ................................................ 247 28.6.1 Soil limit
resistance ................................................................ ............................. 247 28.6.2 Limit resistance of the
pile............. .................................................. .................. 248 28.7 Calculation of foundation pile
settlements .......................... ................................................ 249 28.7. 1 Finite Element Method
(FEM) .......................................................... ....................... 249 28.8 Terrain
modeling........................ .................................................. .................... 250 28.8.1 Finite element
analysis ...................... .................................................. ........... 250
29 Calculation and arrangement of reinforcement................................................................ ............................ 252 29.1

Optimization in the arrangement of the reinforcements................. ...................................... 256
30 Reinforcement calculation and section verification ................................................................ ................ 257

30.1 Allowable voltages................................................................ .................................................. .. 257
30.2 Theoretical references on verification with the ultimate limit state method................................................. 258 30.2
.1 Concrete confinement ................................................. .......................... 260 30.3 Values of physical characteristics
of the land ................. .................................................. ... 263
31 Bibliography................................................. .................................................. .................. 266 31.1 Mesh

generation................................ .................................................. ...................... 266
31.2 Finite Element Method................................................................ .......................................... 266

31.3 General ................................................ .................................................. ................. 267

VIII
USER MANUAL
1 Introduction
The API++ program is dedicated to the analysis and calculation of foundation slabs (on piles and ribbed), of
elevated plates, slabs, plinths (on piles, plinth gratings and isolated plinths), foundation beam gratings (also on piles) and
elevated gratings. It is a comprehensive program developed
using the finite element technique (FEM) which does not require additional modules. The data input
(geometry, loads, constraints, piles, etc.) occurs in both graphic and numerical mode.
It is possible to insert distributed loads, load lines, beam loads, plinth loads and concentrated loads
both vertical and horizontal in any position.
Furthermore, it is possible to insert the position and size of pillars with the relative reliefs or constraints
punctual and scheduled.
In the case of foundation slabs and plinths founded on piles, the stratigraphy of the soil must be defined. For the analysis
of foundation slabs and surface plinths, the alla model is adopted for the soil
Winkler. The mesh for finite element analysis is automatically generated by the program
function of the entities inserted (loads, constraints, piles).

Once the mesh has been generated, it is possible to intervene on the properties of the individual nodes and/or elements in
a convenient graphic environment which provides multiple functions such as single selection,
window, selection by polyline, querying of nodes and elements, etc.
For slabs and plinths founded on piles it is possible to use the following typologies: reinforced concrete piles with
rods and brackets, drilled or fixed; RC micropiles with tubular reinforcement, drilled or driven; with generic section in steel,
drilled or driven.
The stratigraphy of the soil is described by stratigraphic columns. Layers may present
horizontal or even inclined position but cannot intersect below the superstructure.
The water table can be taken into account by defining its share with respect to the laying surface
superstructure.
Once the distribution has been carried out, depending on the stiffness and position of the poles and
soil characteristics, each pile is analyzed using a non-linear analysis in step with
the finite element method.
The ground is considered as a series of horizontal springs with elastoplastic behavior
and the User can select the desired breakage criterion.
API also allows you to set a series of parameters, at the Analysis Options level, which
allow the pile-soil behavior to be best modeled.
The settings concern:
ÿ the lift calculation that can be performed with Terzaghi, Berezantzev, Berezantzev
reduced, Meyerhof, Hansen or Vesic. In addition to the method for calculating lift, it is left
the User has the possibility to set the directly connected vertical pressure trend
to lift. The pressure trend can be Geostatic, Geostatic up to a certain
depth and then constant or Geostatics up to Zc level and then constant. The settings
on the pressure trend are used for peak lift, but can be used
also for lateral lift;

ÿ the law of variation of the Winkler constant with depth, which can be assumed from
Layer, Constant or with a Binomial law;
ÿ the soil failure criterion for the analysis of the pile subjected to horizontal forces (non-analysis
linear) can be kinematic (breaking due to limit displacement definable by the User) or
static type (breakage upon reaching the limit pressure). In this second case the User
can select the law that defines the limiting pressure with depth: limiting pressure
constant, variable limit pressure with binomial law, limit pressure coinciding with the
passive pressure (Broms), or limit pressure defined by the Brinch-Hansen relation; The
pole can be considered infinitely elastic or with elastoplastic behavior;
ÿ the method for calculating the settlement of the piling which can be chosen from Finite Elements.
API carries out the design of the reinforcements for both the piles and the superstructure.
The design and verification of the sections can be carried out according to the Tension method
Admissible or according to the theory of limit states.
When the analysis starts, the API performs a complete check of the data provided and reports, if necessary, with
appropriate messaging, the inconsistencies found.
At the end of the analysis, in the integrated graphical environment, it is possible to view all the results.
In particular, for the superstructure they can be viewed
ÿ stress diagrams (Mx, My, Mxy, ÿx, ÿy, ÿxy);
ÿ displacement diagrams;
ÿ executive drawing of the reinforcements
For the poles can be viewed:
ÿ the distribution of forces on the individual piles and with a simple click of the mouse it is possible to read them
values for each pole;
ÿ the diagrams of the limit stresses on the piles (Moment, Shear, Normal stress, Pressures on the
terrain and Movements), interrogable via mouse;
ÿ the diagrams of the operating stresses on the piles (Moment, Shear, Normal stress, Pressures
on the ground and Movements), which can be queried via mouse;
ÿ load-settlement diagrams for each pile, also in logarithmic scale;
ÿ the reinforcements of each individual pile of the piling and related tension diagrams in the materials.
Any modification of the armor is a very easy operation as it is managed
graphically. For each pole it is possible to change the number and diameter of the longitudinal irons, the
pitch and diameter of the brackets. For every change made, API re-runs the checks in real time
of the sections and immediately reports any exceeding of the regulatory limits or voltages
in materials.

2
API allows you to generate a complete calculation report in RTF format directly
in the editor and arrangement. The selected modules will be reported as well as the
general settings (character settings, text and title alignment, etc.) in order to
obtain an almost definitive report. API allows you to obtain the calculation, both metric and
economic, of the analyzed work.
Each displayed design can be printed on any Windows®-controlled device,
after setting scale, characters, captions, etc.
Printing is managed using the preview or graphic layout function.
Export to DXF, BMP, WMF, JPEG format is also possible.
2 Installing the software from DVD
API++, distributed on DVD, is accompanied by a USB hardware key that must be inserted into the
relevant port on the computer to allow the program to run.
To install, you need to insert the DVD into the player; if the system option is active
Automatic insertion notification, the DVD starts automatically, otherwise you have to launch the
program via the Start.exe file on the DVD. In the installation suite only the
licensed program buttons. To start the installation procedure, click on the relevant button.
API++ is installed in the C:\Aztec\APIPP18 folder, defined by default, or in the specified folder
by the User. All the files needed to run the program are recorded in the
folder specified during installation.
Once the installation is complete, the Aztec Informatica menu item is created in the Programs menu
and the suite's Aztec icon on the Desktop. To start the program, you need to double-click
on the Aztec icon to launch the suite within which the API 18.0 button is located.
On the DVD there are also demo versions of all the programs which can be accessed from the [DEMO] button on the main
window. It is worth specifying that the demonstratives are
performed directly from DVD without installing any files on the hard disk.

4
3 API program working environment
API++ is an extremely interactive program; the API++ working environment has the interface and the
typical features of the WINDOWS environment.
3.1 Environment
When the program is activated, a window like the one in the figure opens, in which it is
There is a main menu on the first line of the screen, which can be accessed via the keyboard or
mouse; immediately below this there is a horizontal toolbar (bar
of commands).
The methods of accessing the menus and the various types of tables are described in detail below
the data input.
3.2 Change the background color
By simultaneously pressing [SHIFT ÿ] and the left mouse button anywhere on the
desktop you have the option to change the background color.
3.3 Activate the help system
By right-clicking on the main window you access the help system
plan.
3.4 Command bar
The command bar contains a series of buttons that are equivalent to commands
activated from the main menu.

The figure shows the command bar with an explanation of the buttons on it.
New You open
Save Save with name
Regulations
Ground Stratigraphy
Materials Plate/stall
Beams Plinths
Poles
Load combinations Generate model
Analysis options Analyses
Reset analysis Armor project
Relation
Graphic input
Loaded inputs
Template graphics
Results graphics

6
4 File menu
In this chapter all the commands present in the File menu item will be explained
principal.
These are all necessary commands for writing and reading data to disk.
The menu contains the following items:
– New, allows you to create a new job;

– Open, allows you to open a previously analyzed file;
– Recent files, allows you to open previously processed files;
– Save, Save as, allows you to save the currently analyzed file;
– Import, allows you to import the data (stresses) deriving from the calculation of the
superstructure;
– File reading options, allows you to set options for previously reading files
analyzed (reading of data and/or results only);
– Exit, allows you to exit the program.
4.1 New
Through the New command you communicate to API that you want to start a new job. The program
asks if you want to save the current data.
4.2 Open
Using this command it is possible to load a previously saved file.
The default extension of API data files is pia.
The procedure is the standard one in the Windows environment: the opened window presents the list of
folders and the list of files present in the selected folder.
If you are already working on a job and the data has not been saved to disk, when asked
When opening a file, a window appears asking if you want to save the current data. When
a file is loaded, API immediately opens the graphic display window.
4.3 Save
Using this command it is possible to save the input data in a file on disk.
The procedure is the standard one in the Windows environment: the opened window presents the list of
folders and the list of files present in the selected folder.
The data recording procedure is also automatically called by the program
Exit request from the program itself if the data has not been saved.
4.4 Import
The command allows access to the Import MasterSap® (AMV), Import
STACEC and Import text files that allow you to acquire the stresses obtained in
foundation from the related structural calculations.

Corso Umberto, 43 – 87059 Casali del Manco – Loc. Casole Bruzio (CS) - tel/ fax (0984) 432617 ra
8
4.4.1 Import text files
The command allows you to acquire data from text files according to the following specifications
FORMAT 1 and FORMAT 2
<number of pillars>
<number of combinations>
<unit of measurement of forces>
<unit of measurement of lengths>
<pillar index> <x coordinate> <y coordinate>
…...
if we also want to import combination and earthquake type:
<combination type> <earthquake x> <earthquake y>
……
Import Format 1: <pillar index> <combination index> <Tx><Ty><N><Mx><My><Mt>

Import Format 2: <N><Tx><Ty><Mx><My><Mt>
…...
Note
Combination type specifications: SLU, SLV, SLEQ, SLER, SLEF, SLD.
Example n°1: 2 columns with 4 load combinations - Import Format 1

2
4
kg
cm
1 460.0 217.0
2 460.0 355.0
1 1 -737 1 2 -684 1 3 -728 539 58998 -251700 -312100 0
1 4 -675 2 1 -562 2 2 -542 479 44740 -226700 -296800 0
2 3 -556 2 4 -536 529 56871 -250500 -308500 0
468 42613 -225500 -293300 0
880 69003 -335500 -259600 0
726 51507 -283000 -254000 0
785 64676 -309600 -257100 0
632 47181 -257100 -251400 0
If the type of combination is also present, the file must be composed as follows:
2
4
kg
cm
1 460.0 217.0
2 460.0 355.0
SLU 0.0 0.0
SLER 0.0 0.0
SLEF 0.0 0.0
SLD 0.3 0.0
1 -737 1 -684 1 -728 1 -675 539 58998 -251700 -312100 0
1 479 44740 -226700 -296800 0
2 529 56871 -250500 -308500 0
34 468 42613 -225500 -293300 0
2 -562 880 69003 -335500 -259600 0

2 1 -542 726 51507 -283000 -254000 0
2 2 -556 785 64676 -309600 -257100 0
2 34 -536 632 47181 -257100 -251400 0
Example n°2: 2 columns with 4 load combinations - Import Format 2

2
4
kg
cm
1 460.0 217.0
2 460.0 355.0
58998 -737 44740 539 -251700 -312100 0
-684 56871 -728 479 -226700 -296800 0
42613 -675 69003 529 -250500 -308500 0
-562 51507 -542 468 -225500 -293300 0
64676 -556 47181 880 -335500 -259600 0
-536 726 -283000 -254000 0
785 -309600 -257100 0
632 -257100 -251400 0
In the load analysis the torque Mt is not taken into consideration.
FORMAT 3
<number of pillars>
<number of combinations>
<unit of measurement of forces>
<unit of measurement of lengths>
<pillar index><x coordinate><y coordinate><combination index><N><Mx><My><Tx><Ty>
Example: 3 pillars with 4 load combinations

3
4
kg
m
5.0 3.5 25000 1236 450 852 600 563
1 7.0 3.5 12500 320 654 1000 452 236
2 9.0 3.5 18000 987 650 1020 520 625 560
5.0 3.5 1 7000 0 0 1200 987 410 450
3 7.0 3.5 1 5000 850 654 654 -230 250
1 9.0 3.5 1 156 789 852 0
5.0 3.5 2 0 888 999 750 850 0 450
2 7.0 3.5 2 9865 600 600
3 9.0 3.5 2 4562 741 960
5.0 3.5 3 3256 120 125
1 7.0 3.5 3 8754 330 133
23123 9.0 3.5 3444 5566 8521 410 256 200

10
Important: If there is a null combination (row with zero loads), as in the previous example,
it must be inserted in any case.
The choice of the Import Format and the sign conventions for the loads is made via the
Import window.
4.5 File reading options

You can access the File Reading Options window from the File menu item of the same name.
In the window you can set reading options. AND'
You can set these options to recover file data
damaged. The options made available are: Read mesh,
read analysis results, read armor results and open window
graphical display. The first option concerns the model of
calculation, the second and third concerns the actual calculation,
while the last option concerns the drawing of the results.
4.6 Exit
Using this command it is possible to exit the program. If the data has not been saved,
the request to save them appears.
5 Conventions
5.1 Loads
N, Fv Vertical force in positive Z direction downwards
Fx Horizontal force in the positive X direction in the direction of increasing
Fy Horizontal force in positive Y direction in the direction of increasing Y
Mx Moment with vector axis parallel to the positive X axis counterclockwise (figure 1)
My Moment with vector axis parallel to the positive counterclockwise Y axis (figure 2)
5.2 Stresses
Mx Bending moment
My Y bending moment with vector axis parallel to the X axis (positive if it strains the lower fibers)

12
6 Data Menu
The menu allows you to access the main windows for

the insertion of essential data for the description of the problem.
The figure shows the menu items that will come next
specify better.
6.1 General Data
It is possible to the General data window from the entry

namesake of the Data menu. In the window it is possible
enter: Project name, Company, Municipality,
Designer, Works Manager and Contracting Company.
These data will be reported.
6.2 Typology
It is possible in the Type window from the entry of the same name
Data menu. In the window you tell the program which one
type of foundation that needs to be analyzed.
The program gives you the possibility to choose between:
– Elevated structure;
– Foundation structure;
– Slab.
6.3 Regulations
It is possible to access the Regulations window by clicking on the item of the same name in the Data menu.
In the window it is possible to define the type of regulation, choosing between:

– Ministerial Decree 1988 + Ministerial Decree 1996 Allowable voltages
– Ministerial Decree 1988 + Ministerial Decree 1996 Limit state;
– 2008 Standards - Approach 1;
– 2008 Standards - Approach 2.

– 2018 standards
Depending on the selected regulation, a series of panels are activated that allow you to define
a series of parameters.
If the chosen regulation is DM 1988 + DM 1996 Admissible voltages, the panels are activated
Superficial foundation and piles, in which it is possible to set the coeffs. safety at limit load,
sliding and tipping and safety factors for tip, lateral and transversal lift.
If the chosen regulation is DM 1988 + DM 1996 Limit state in addition to the panels discussed before, yes
activates the DM96 Actions panel in which you can set the coeffs. partial on the shares
permanent and favorable and unfavorable variables.

14
If the chosen regulation is the 2008 Regulations or the 2018 Regulations, the Actions panels are activated,
Geotechnical parameters, superficial foundation, piles and ductility classes in which it is possible
setting up:
– in Shares, the coefficients. partial on permanent, permanent non-structural, variable and variable actions
by favorable and unfavorable traffic;
– in Geotechnical parameters, the coeff. partials on the resistances (tan f, c' cu);
– in superficial foundation, the coeffs. safety devices to be applied to the characteristic resistors
of the superficial foundation (bearing capacity, sliding and overturning);
– in Pali, the coeff. safety to be applied to the characteristic resistances of the piles (bearing capacity).
tip, lateral compression and lateral traction and transverse bearing);
– in Ductility classes it is possible to define the ductility class of the superstructure and the related factors
overstrength required by the regulations.
In the Other panel you can set data for existing objects.
By clicking on the <Set coefficients> button all the coefficients are set. of the legislation
selected.
6.4 Materials
The Materials window can be accessed from the item of the same name in the Data menu or from
button on the command bar. The window shows the list of defined materials
6.4.1 Material definition
It is possible to define:
Material concrete
– Concrete specific weight, expressed in
[F1 / L13];
– Cubic characteristic resistance of
concrete (Rbk), expressed in [P1];
– Average characteristic resistance (fcm),
expressed in [P1]
– Elastic modulus E, expressed in [P1];
– Poisson's ratio
– Type of steel used (FeB44K, B450C);
– Homogenization coefficient.
– Breakdown diagram. If you use the
NTC 2018 you can adopt the model

by Kent & Park which takes the effect into account
section confinement.
Steel material (for poles)
– Specific weight, expressed in [F1 / L13];
– Elastic modulus E, expressed in [P1];

– Poisson's ratio
– Type of steel

16
By clicking on the [Edit] button next to the steel type selector, you can access the
Steel material definition window to be able to define its characteristics.
Each material can be associated with a color.
6.4.1.1 Steel material definition window
The Steel Material Definition window can be accessed by clicking on the [Edit] button located at
right of the Steel Type selector in the Material window.
In this window you enter the values of the resistance characteristics of the steel used.
In particular, it is possible to define:
– Material name;
– Allowable voltage, expressed in [P1];
– Characteristic yield stress, expressed in [P1];
– Characteristic breakdown voltage, expressed in [P1];
6.5 Land
It is possible to access the Land Description window from the item of the same name in the Data menu or from
button on the command bar. The window is active only for plates, plinths and trellises
foundation beams. The list shows the resistance parameters of the defined soils.
The data reported are:

– Description, identification of the land;
– Natural volume weight, expressed in the unit [F1 / L13 ];
– Saturated volume weight, expressed in the unit [F1 / L13 ];
– Friction angle, expressed in [°];
– Ground friction angle – foundation, expressed in [°];
– Cohesion, expressed in [P1];
– Soil-foundation adhesion, expressed in [P1];
– the color associated with the terrain.
Through the [Add], [Edit] and [Delete] buttons, it is possible to respectively add a
new terrain and modify or delete existing terrain.
By clicking on the [Add] and [Edit] buttons you can access the Definition window
land no. … in which it is possible to define the parameters listed above.
6.5.1 Terrain characteristics window
The Land Definition No. ... window can be accessed by clicking on the [Add] and [Edit] buttons in the
Land List window, or by clicking (double-clicking) in the land description panel
associated with the layer in the stratigraphy definition window.

The window is divided into two sections: Resistance parameters and Deformability parameters.
In the Resistance Parameters section it is possible to define the data for calculating the lift of the
foundation:
– Description, identification of the land;
– Natural volume weight, expressed in the unit [F1 / L13 ];
– Saturated volume weight, expressed in the unit [F1 / L13 ];
– Friction angle, expressed in [°];
– Ground friction angle – foundation,
expressed in [°]. The angle of ground friction
foundation is used by the program
for the scrolling check (for the
shallow foundations [ N × tan (ÿ) ]) and for
the calculation of the lateral bearing capacity (for the poles
[ ks × ÿv × tan (ÿ) ]). The program in
function of the position of the land
compared to that of the foundation
automatically recognizes which one
resistance parameter use;
– Cohesion, expressed in [P1];
– Soil-foundation adhesion, expressed in [P1]. Soil-foundation adhesion is used
from the program for sliding verification (for shallow foundations [ A × ca ]) and for the
calculation of the lateral bearing capacity (for the piles [ A × ca ]). The program depending on the position of the
soil compared to that of the foundation automatically recognizes which parameter
resistance to use.
The strength rates for the creep test ([ N × tan (ÿ) ] and [ A × ca ]) and for the calculation
of the lateral bearing capacity of the piles ([ ks × ÿv × tan (ÿ) ] and [ A × ca ]) are added.

18
The buttons [C] that appear alongside the fields relating to the ground-pole friction angle ed
upon adhesion they allow the automatic calculation of the value equal to 2/3 of the angle respectively
of friction and 50% of cohesion.
The Average and Minimum resistance parameters are necessary for the calculation of the characteristic lifts
of the poles with the NTC 2008 – NTC 2018.
For the calculation of micropiles, if the Bustamante-Doix method is used, it is possible to define:
• the limiting tangential stress, expressed in [P1];
• the coeff. of lateral expansion;
By clicking on the Calculate button it is possible to obtain these parameters automatically

nature of the defined terrain.
In the Deformability Parameters section it is possible to define the data for calculating settlements,
when using the interaction method as a calculation model between soil and foundation. For the
settlement calculation, the program implements three alternative methods: the elastic method, the oedometric method in the two
variants that use the oedometric module and the oedometric curve (or method
non-linear oedometric).
The data to enter if you want to use the elastic method are:
– the elastic modulus, expressed in [P1];
– Poisson's ratio.
The only data to enter if you want to use the oedometric method in the variant that uses the
oedometric module is the oedometric module, expressed in [P1].

The data to be entered if you want to use the
oedometric method in the variant it uses
the oedometric curve are:
– the recompression ratio (RR),
slope of the curve in the section of
recompression;
– the compression ratio (CR),
slope of the curve in the section of
compression;
– the degree of over consolidation (OCR).
It may happen that the oedometric curve, and therefore the method, is not known for all defined terrains
oedometric (which uses the oedometric curve) can also be used in a mixed way. In
essentially, if the oedometric module has been determined for one soil and the curve for another soil
oedometric, we can define the parameters relating to the two methods (for the terrain where the
only the oedometric module is defined only the oedometric module vice versa for the soils where it is
knows the oedometric curve, only the data relating to the curve are defined) and the program will use the
one or the other depending on the layer in which failure is being assessed.
Each soil can be assigned a color and a fill which will be shown in the graphics.
ATTENTION
The recompression ratio (RR) is not the same as the recompression index (cr). The law that binds i
two parameters is: RR = cr / ( 1 + e0 );
The compression ratio (CR) is not the same as the compression index (cc). The law that links the two parameters is: CR =
cc / ( 1 + e0 );
6.6 Stratigraphy
It is possible to the Stratigraphy window from the item of the same name in the Data menu or from the button present
on the command bar. The window is active only for foundation beam plates, plinths and lattices.
The stratigraphy of the soil is described by stratigraphic columns. Layers may present
horizontal or even inclined position but they cannot intersect below the foundation.

20
The window allows you to define:
– Plan position of the three survey points (X, Y), expressed in [L1];
– Height at which the layer separation was identified in the three points (Z1, Z2, Z3), expressed
in [L1];
– Type of terrain to be assigned to the selected layer (chosen from the previously defined terrains);
From the Details column or from the <Layer Details> button you access the Layer Details window
allows you to set the following parameters necessary in the calculation of the piles:
– Coefficient of lateral ground thrust (ks), used in the calculation of the lateral bearing capacity of the
poles [ ks × ÿv × tan (ÿ) ];
– Horizontal Winkler constant (kw), expressed in [P1]/[L2].
– Coefficient of lateral expansion of the injected section (debulking coefficient). The coefficient
of lateral expansion multiplies the diameter of the hole to obtain the actual calculation for the
lift: Deff=a*D where D is the perforation diameter and a is the expansion coefficient
lateral
Furthermore, a thrust coefficient can be indicated (used in shaped plinth foundations
rectangular and superficial) to take into account the resistance of the lateral surfaces in the calculation of the
sliding, as indicated in the 2018 NTC.
By clicking on the C button (which stands for calculate) it is possible to automatically calculate the constant of
Horizontal winkler on the pole. Different bibliography formulas have been implemented for each of them
which could refer to:
• data that serve only to determine the stiffness, present only in the table
specific;
• data that are used for other calculations already present in the program. In this case the
program automatically loads these values.
Correlations for estimating the horizontal Winkler constant on piles
6.7 Water table
It is possible to access the Roof window from the item of the same name in the Data menu. The window is active only for
foundation beam plates, plinths and trellises.
In the window you can define:
– if the aquifer is present;
– the share compared to the campaign plan, expressed in [L1]. Such
value is considered positive downwards.

22
6.8 Beam types
It is possible to access the List of beam types window via the item of the same name in the Data or menu
from the button on the command bar.
The window contains the list of defined beam types. The buttons at the bottom of the window allow you to
define new types of beams or to modify or delete them
existing typologies.
6.8.1 Definition of beam typology
You can access the Beam Definition window by clicking on the [Add] or [Edit] buttons
of the List of beam types window
– if it is an existing element;
– the base (B) and the height (H) of the beam (core
of the beam if the beam is an inverted T),
expressed in [L2];
– if the beam is an inverted T it is possible to define
also base (Ba) and height (Ha) of the wing,
expressed in [L2];
– the type of material, chosen among the materials
defined;
– if the beam is a connecting beam between

plinths it is possible to define the type of connection
(choice between collar surface, installation surface
or quota defined in the insertion of the
beam);
– the specifications for the armor design.
– the connection between the beam and the plinths (choice of joint or support);
– whether to consider the beam as a connection curb;
Example:
Collar top Installation plan
The beam at the collar plane could be aligned in two ways:
– plinth extrados with beam extrados;
– plinth extrados with beam intrados.
The program does not allow you to define the fixed wire between the beam and the plinth, so what comes
displayed is always the second of the diagrams (plinth extrados with beam intrados).
The data that makes the difference (in the calculation model) between one scheme and another is the constraint between the plinth
and beam (fitting or support), and the behavior of the beam (Winkler beam, beam as
curb or suspended beam).
A beam embedded in the plinth is most likely made with the first of the schemes
(extrados plinth with extrados beam), a beam resting on the plinth most likely
it is created with the second of the schemes (extrados plinth with intrados beam).
From the <Reinforcement specifications> button you access the window for setting the project parameters
of armour.
24
6.8.1.1 Beam reinforcement options
In this window you can set the specifications for the beam reinforcement design.
The window is divided into three sections: Longitudinal bars, Specifications and Brackets.
The data to be entered in the Longitudinal bars section are:
– Concrete cover, expressed in the unit [L2];
– Lower rod diameter, expressed in the unit [L3];
– Upper rod diameter, expressed in the unit [L3];
– Anchorage length (represents the length
beyond which iron can be considered a reagent),
expressed in diameters;
– % Minimum tensioned reinforcement with respect to the area of
concrete;
– % Minimum compressed reinforcement with respect to the area of
concrete;
– Minimum number of lower bars in the tensioned area;
– Minimum number of upper bars in the compressed area.
You can tell the program to refer to the Regulations (Circular April 1997 nr. 97) by activating the Circular Reinforcement
nr. option. 65/97.
It should be noted that ministerial circular 65/97 imposes minimums both in the tense zone and in the zone
compressed equal to (steel area/concrete area ratio)
= 1.4
ÿ min
f
yk
where fyk is the characteristic yield stress of the steel used expressed in N/mm2.
For example, for a FeB44K steel fyk=440 N/mm2 and therefore the minimum percentage is in the
tense which in the compressed area is equal to 0.32%.
The data to be entered in the Specifications section are:
– Maximum length of bars, expressed in units [L1];
– Horizontal and vertical bracket length, expressed in the unit [L2];
– Uniforms upper and lower irons, allows you to extend the irons across the entire beam even if it is
only necessary in some areas.
The data to be entered in the Brackets section are:
– Bracket diameter, expressed in the unit [L3];
– Maximum stirrup pitch, expressed in units [L2];
– Percentage of cut that the brackets must absorb;

– Number of bracket arms;
– Length for joining the sections, expressed as a function of the height of the section.
– If we are analyzing the structure with the NTC 2008 – NTC 2018 it is possible to choose the limits
on the brackets between the seismic zone and the non-seismic zone.
– the cotg ÿ, which can be defined or calculated automatically by the software to optimize the
values resistant to shear-compression and shear-traction
For beams defined as curb, the calculation of the reinforcement follows what is reported in the NTC
par.7.2.5 “HORIZONTAL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE FOUNDATION ELEMENTS”.

26
6.9 Plinth types

It is possible to access the Plinth type window from the item of the same name in the Data menu or from
button on the command bar. The menu item is not present if the type of
structure is elevated.
The window contains a list of plinth types.

By clicking on the [Add], [Modify] and [Delete] buttons you can respectively add
a new type of plinth, modify or eliminate an existing one.
To define the geometric characteristics of a type of plinth, access the window
Plinth geometry.
6.9.1 Plinth geometry
It is possible to access the Plinth Geometry window by clicking on the [Add] or [Edit] buttons
of the Plinth Types window.

– if it exists;
– the description of the plinth, to be able to better identify it during the insertion phase. By clicking
on the description (double click) the program automatically assigns a description in the
which shows the shape of the plinth and the overall dimensions in plan (Rectangular 2.00 x 2.00);
– the shape of the plinth, it is possible to choose between the predefined shapes: rectangular, circular,
triangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, nut-shaped;
– the dimensions of the plinth: the base, the height, the collar (imprint of the pillar inserted into the plinth),
the eccentricity of the collar with respect to the center of gravity is possible if the plinth contains two pillars
activate the presence of the second collar with dimensions and position, geometry of the lean,
expressed in [L1];
– the material with which the plinth will be made
From the button next to the <dice> type you access the window to define the number and the
geometry of the nuts that make up the plinth.
The base is excluded from the list of nuts, which is always defined by the general dimensions (Bx e
By) and the height indicated with Hb.
From the Glass selectors it is possible to choose the type of glass to associate with the collars of
plinth.

28
The Set load application point height check allows you to indicate the application height
of the load above the plinth, expressed in [L1]. Horizontal loads are always applied
to the extrados of the plinth, but if for some reason you need to have a point of
application different from the extrados of the plinth by defining the height of a value other than zero
application rises further than the extrados.
Punching check nut index, active only if the plinth shape is a nut, allows you to
define the nut (and therefore the load footprint area) that the program must use in the verification a
punching. If you do not define this parameter (leave the value zero) the verification a
punching on the plinth is performed using the dimensions of the collar, alternatively defining
a die index (other than zero) in punching verification the indentation area is used
of the indicated nut.
From the <Reinforcement specifications> button you access the window for setting the project parameters
of armour.
6.9.1.1 Plinth reinforcement options
In this window you can set the specifications for the design of the plinth reinforcements.
The window is divided into two sections: Reinforcement parameters and Cutting/Punching
In the Reinforcement parameters section it is possible to set:

–
Concrete cover, expressed in [L2];
–
Lower iron diameter, expressed
in [L3];
–
Length of anchoring
(represents the length beyond the
which iron can be considered
reagent), expressed in diameters;

– % Minimum stretched armor
relative to the concrete area;
– % Compressed armor compared
to the concrete area;

–
Minimum number of lower bars per
linear meter;
–
Minimum number of upper bars per
linear meter;
– Percentage thickening
distributors.
–
Furthermore, it is possible to set the type of shape to be placed as longitudinal bars in the plinth.
The choice can be made between two choices: Straight irons or Straight irons + stirrups.
The Cutting/Punching section proposes the same specifications that will be illustrated for the
plate.
6.10 Types of piles
It is possible to access the List of pole types window from the item of the same name in the Data menu
menu item is active for foundation structures.
The window contains the list of defined pole types. The buttons in the lower part of the window allow you to
define new types or to modify or delete existing types.
6.10.1 Definition of pole typology
In the window you can set the common characteristics of the foundation piles. In particular it is
can set:
– the description, identifier of the type;
– if it exists;
– the geometry chosen between circular reinforced concrete poles
and generic section poles;

– the reinforcement chosen from longitudinal irons +
brackets, longitudinal irons + spiral and tubular
– the constraint at the head (constraint between the pole and the audience,
plinth or beam). It is possible to choose between

hinge constraint and joint constraint;
– the construction type of the pole. AND'
possible to choose between bored piles (if yes
chooses the method of installation of the poles
through drilling with an auger.) and piles
fixtures (if you choose the method of installing
the poles by driving). The flu
of the method of construction of the pole yes
reflects on the assumed soil resistance
from the program in the lift calculation;

30
– the type of lift to consider when calculating the lift. It is possible to choose between lift
lateral (by activating this check, the rate of
ground lift due to lateral resistance-friction), tip lift (by activating this check you
considers the bearing capacity of the ground at the tip in the calculation of the vertical limit load) o
both.
– uses the Bustamante-Doix method for calculating micropiles, allowing you to opt for a different method from
the one chosen for the calculation of the bearing capacity in the presence of piles and micropiles in the same system
backdrop.
– the material constituting the pole
6.10.1.1 Pole reinforcements
In the window you set the data for the pile reinforcement project:
reinforced poles
– longitudinal rod diameter, [L3];

– concrete cover, [L2];
– bracket diameter, [L3];

– minimum number of rows;
– minimum percentage of reinforcement;

– anchoring length
– maximum bracket pitch
micropiles
– tubular external diameter, [L3]
– tubular thickness, [L3].
6.11 Types of glasses
It is possible to access the List of glass types window via the menu item of the same name
Data.
The window contains the list of defined glass types. The buttons at the bottom
of the window, allow you to define new types of glasses or to modify or delete them
existing typologies.
6.11.1 Definition of glass typology
– if it exists;
– the description of the glass;
– the dimensions in plan, the height and the thicknesses at the base and top, expressed in [L1];
- the material
– the fixed wire, it is possible to choose between
internal wire (internal vertical wall and
external taper) and external thread
(external vertical wall and taper
internal). The edge must be defined when the glass
is thick
variable.

32
6.11.1.1 Glass reinforcement
It is possible to set:
ÿ concrete cover, expressed in [L2];
ÿ diameter of the vertical bars, expressed as [L3];

ÿ diameter of the vertical wall bars,
expressed on [L3];
ÿ anchoring length (represents the

length beyond which iron can be considered a
reagent), expressed in
diameters;
ÿ maximum air gap, expressed in diameters;

ÿ bracket diameter (horizontal bars), expressed in
[L3];
ÿ maximum bracket pitch, expressed in [L2].
The verification of the glasses is carried out with the CNR 10025/84 regulation. This legislation provides
as resistant armor the vertical armor arranged in the corner pillars of the glass and the
horizontal brackets arranged above and below. The maximum air gap definable in this
window is used by the program to provide a minimum technological armor as well
on the walls of the glass which are irrelevant in structural checks.
6.12 Units of measurement
API, allows the User to set

of the units of measurement. At the window in
figure is accessed through voice

of the same name in the Data menu or by clicking on
button on the toolbar

commands.
In particular are put to

available to the User as follows
unit:
– L1, first unit of measurement for le

lengths, the default value is
meters;
– L2, second unit of measurement for lengths, the default value is centimeters;
– L3, third unit of measurement for lengths, the default value is millimeters;
– F1, first unit of measurement for forces, the default value is kilograms;
– F2, second unit of measurement for forces, the default value is tons;
– P1, first unit of measurement for pressures, the default value is Kg/ cm2;
– P2, second unit of measurement for pressures, the default value is Kg/ m2;
– A, unit of measurement for angles, the default value is degrees.

Derived quantities:
– Momentum, [F1 × L1];
– Volume unit weight, [F1 / L13 ];
– Winkler constant, [P1 / L2];
– Area, [L22 ].

34
7 Geometry menu
The menu allows access to the main windows for entering essential geometric data
for the description of the structure. The figure shows the menu items that will be better specified later.
7.1 Structure size

The Structure dimension window can be accessed from the Geometry o menu item of the same name
from the button on the command bar.

– the maximum overall dimensions of the structure in the plane, abscissa and minimum and maximum ordinate, expressed in
[L1];
7.2 Plate
It is possible to access the Plate definition window via the menu item of the same name
Geometry or from the Graphic Input window when the Plate phase is active.
The window contains:
– a table with the list of polygons that define the plate. The first polygon defines the
outermost contour while the subsequent polygons define the internal holes;
– the material that constitutes it, chosen from the defined materials;
– the amount of the Winkler constant to be used on the plate, with a value between zero and one;
– the depth of the installation surface, expressed in [L1].
– if it exists;
– fixed wire in case of variable thickness;
– arrangement of beams.
To define/modify the plate polygons you can access the Definition window
polygon by clicking on the Add polygon or Edit polygon buttons.
7.3 List of Plinths
The Plinth List window can be accessed from the Geometry menu item of the same name or from
graphic input window. The menu item is not present if the type of structure is not of
foundation.

36
The window contains the list of plinths inserted with the salient characteristics of the plinth indicated
(position and installation plane expressed in [L1], typology). By clicking on the [Add], [Modify] and [Delete]
buttons you can respectively add a new plinth or modify and delete a
existing plinth. When adding or modifying the plinth, the Insert window opens
Plinth in which it is possible to define the position of the plinth.
The last column in the list is the PALI column. By clicking inside the cell relating to the plinth i
th it is possible to access the Pile List window of the selected plinth from which it is possible
define the plinth piles.
7.3.1 Insert/Modify plinth
It is possible to access the Plinth Insertion window by clicking on the [Add] or [Modify] buttons
of the Plinth List window or from the Graphic Input window when you are in the phase
insert/edit plinth and click inside the drawing area.

– the type of plinth, chosen from the types
defined;
– the position in the plan (abscissa X and
ordinate Y), expressed in [L1];
– rotation, (positive if counterclockwise),
expressed in [°];
– the depth of the installation surface,
positive downwards expressed in [L1].
– Winkler constant rate , value between 0.0 and 1.0.
When the modification involves multiple plinths, checks are also displayed in the table
allow modification of only the selected properties.
7.4 List of Beams
The Beam List window can be accessed from the Geometry menu item of the same name or from
graphic input window. The menu item is not active when the type of structure to be analyzed
it's a slab.
The beam can be used in the program as a support beam for an elevated plate,
as a rib of a foundation slab, as a connecting element between plinths or
simply as a foundation trellis. The beams when used on an audience of
foundation or elevation can be arranged above or below the foundation.
The window contains a list of the defined beams with indicated: the position expressed in [L1], the
length expressed in [L1], the installation plan, the type attributed. By clicking on the button
[Add], [Edit] or [Delete] you can respectively add a new beam or
modify and delete an existing beam. When you add or modify a beam it comes
the Beam Definition window is opened in which it is possible to define the position and geometry of the
beam.
7.4.1 Insert/Modify beam
You can access the Beam Definition window by clicking on the [Add] or [Edit] buttons
of the Beam List window or from the Graphic Input window when you are in the insertion phase -

38
edit beam and draw a beam in the area
of drawing.
– the type of beam chosen from the types
defined
– the initial (Xi, Yi) and final (Xf, Yf) coordinates

of the beam, expressed in [L1];
– the depth of the installation surface, positive
downwards and expressed in [L1]
– the thickness of any lean meat
expressed in [L1];
– the rate of Wilkler's constant if the beam has a load-bearing function. This value is expressed
as a percentage and can take on a value between 0 and 1. Depending on the value that
assumes this size the program treats the beam differently:
– Value = 0.00, we are telling the program that the beam does not collaborate in the lift;
– Value = 1.00, we are communicating to the program that the beam collaborates in the lift
maximum of its capacity;
– Value between 0.00 and 1.00, we are communicating to the program that the beam collaborates in
part of the lift.
Example:
Winkler constant Winkler constant Winkler constant
equals 0.00 between 0.00 and 1.00 equals 1.00
7.4.1.1 Modify beam length
It is possible to access the Modify beam length window by clicking on the [Modify] buttons
of the Insert/Edit Beam window.
The permitted modifications may concern: the extension of the ends while leaving the
direction of the beam or the length and/or rotation leaving one of the two points of the beam unchanged
beam.
If you want to change length and/or rotation, yes

chooses the fixed endpoint (first or second point) e
the length and rotation of the beam is changed
(rotation in the plane).
If you want to prolong the extremes alone by leaving
the direction of the beam unchanged, they are defined as the
extension lengths of the first and the

second vertex, expressed in [L1].
7.5 List of Poles

The Post List window can be accessed from the Geometry menu item of the same name or from
graphic input window .
From this window it is possible to define the arrangement and geometry of the poles to be positioned under the
slabs, plinths and foundation beam trellises.
The same window can also be opened by clicking on the button contained in the cell
POLES column of the Plinth List table.
In particular, the table contains:
– the pole index;
– the position in the plan (abscissa X and ordinate Y), expressed in [L1];
– the diameter of the pile, expressed in [L2];
– the length of the pole, expressed in [L1].
– the typology adopted

40
If the table is called from the List of plinths, only the plinth posts are listed in the table
selected, and the coordinates are referred to the local reference system at the plinth (centre of gravity).
Poles can also be imported automatically from a text file. The file must have the
characteristics of the format shown below:
Post import format (position only)
Number of poles
Unit of measurement of lengths in which positions will be expressed

Abscissa [TAB] First pole ordinate
Abscissa [TAB] Second pole ordinate
..
Abscissa [TAB] Last pole ordinate
Numerical example (6 poles)
6
m
0.5 0.2
2.5 1.2
3.6 1.2
4.5 0.2
5.2 2.5
2.5 2.5
Post import format (position and geometry)
Number of poles
Unit of measurement of lengths in which the positions and dimensions of the pole will be expressed
Abscissa [TAB] Ordinate [TAB] Diameter [TAB] Length of the first pole
Abscissa [TAB] Ordinate [TAB] Diameter [TAB] Length of the second pole
...
Abscissa [TAB] Ordinate [TAB] Diameter [TAB] Last pole length
Numerical example (6 poles)
6
cm
50 20 40 1000.0
250 120 60 1200.0

360 120 40 800.0
450 20 100 1200.0
520 250 20 1000.0
250 250 50 600.0
7.5.1.1 Pole definition
It is possible to access the Pole Definition window by clicking on the [Add] or [Edit] buttons
of the Post List window.
In the table it is possible to define:
– abscissa and ordinate, position of the pillar in plan,

expressed in [L1];
– diameter, expressed in [L2];
– length, expressed in [L1].
If the piles have been defined as having a generic section, in addition to the data
just listed, add:

– area, expressed in [L2^2];
– inertia, expressed in [L2^4];
– resistance modulus, expressed in [L2^3];
– ultimate moment, expressed in [F1 L1].
– shear verification area of the section, expressed in [L2^2];
The ultimate moment can be obtained as the product of the yield stress of the steel
used for the pile multiplied by the resistance modulus of the section.
The insertion of the poles can also take place through the graphic input procedures or via
automatic generation.
7.6 List of Pillars
The Pillar List window can be accessed from the Geometry o menu item of the same name
from the graphic input window.

42
From this window it is
possible to define there
layout and geometry
of the pillars that unload
on the foundation slab.

The window contains a
list of inserted pillars

with indicated the
characteristics of the pillar
(position and geometry).
a new pillar or edit and delete an existing pillar. When adding or editing
In the pillar, the pillar definition window opens in which you can define the position
for the pillar.
7.6.1 Pillar definition

You can access the Pillar Definition window by clicking on the [Add] or [Edit] buttons in the Pillar List window .
– the position of the pillar (abscissa and ordinate in plan),
expressed in [L1];
– the dimensions in the X (Bx) and Y (By) direction of the pillar,
expressed in [L2];
– the rotation in the plan (Alpha), expressed in [°], positive

counterclockwise;
– the type of glass to be associated with the pillar.

7.7 List of thicknesses
The Thickness list window can be accessed from the Geometry o menu item of the same name
from the graphic input window. The menu item is active for foundation audiences.
The window contains a list of the inserted thicknesses with the characteristics indicated (position,
thickness and colour).
By clicking on the [Add], [Edit] and [Delete] buttons you can respectively add
a new thickness or edit and delete an existing thickness. When you add or change the thickness, the Thickness
Definition window opens where you can define
position, thickness and color.
7.7.1 Thickness definition
It is possible to access the Thickness definition window

by clicking on the [Add] or [Edit] buttons in the window
List of thicknesses.
– if the plan shape of the thickness is rectangular
with the sides parallel to the main X and Y directions, that's it
define abscissa and ordinate of the lower left point and of
upper right point of the rectangle, expressed in [L1];
– if the plan shape of the thickness is irregular,
by clicking on the [Polygon coordinates >>] button is
it is possible to access the Polygon Coordinates window and define the geometry in the plan by points;
– the thickness, expressed in [L2];
– the color associated with the current thickness. Each thickness can be associated with a color
different. Equal thicknesses will have equal colors.
Furthermore, the window contains buttons:

44
Extend to the entire foundation, allows you to extend the thickness to the entire plate. At the click
of the button the lower left point and upper right point fields are displayed
automatically updated with the coordinates of the points that define the footprint
maximum of the foundation.
Generate polygon, allows you to automatically generate (through the definition of a few
parameters) a polygonal area with constant thickness (polygon with a greater number of points
or equal to 3 or circular). Clicking on this button opens the Generate window
polygon in which it is possible to set the parameters for automatic generation.
If overlapping thickness fields are defined, the last thickness defined will be considered in the overlap zone.
7.8 Winkler's Constant List
You can access the Winkler Constant List window from the menu item of the same name
Geometry or from the graphic input window. The menu item is active for slabs, plinths and trellises
foundation beams.
The window contains a list of the inserted thicknesses with the characteristics indicated (position, Winkler
constant and color).
The definition of the vertical Winkler constant is necessary for shallow foundations (not
founded on piles) and for the analysis of mixed foundations (whose load-bearing capacity is attributed partially
to the surface foundation and piles). The program allows you to define different fields having
different Winkler constants.
a new zone or modify and delete an existing zone with constant Winkler constant.
When you add or modify the Winkler constant the Definition window opens
Winkler constant in which it is possible to define position, Winkler constant and color.
7.8.1 Definition of Winkler's constant
You can access the Winkler Constant Definition window by clicking on the buttons
[Add] or [Edit] of the Winkler Constant List window.
– if the plan shape of the Winkler constant is shape
rectangular with sides parallel to the principal X and Y directions,
just define the abscissa and ordinate of the lower left point
and the upper right point of the rectangle, expressed in
[L1];
– if the plan shape of the Winkler constant is shape
irregular, by clicking on the [Polygon coordinates
>>] you can access the Coordinates window
polygon and define the geometry in the plan by points;
– the vertical surface Winkler constant ed
horizontal (which will be taken into consideration based on
settings in the interaction model), expressed in
[kg/cm2 /cm] ;
– the color associated with the current thickness. For each Winkler constant it is possible to associate a
different color. Areas with the same Winkler constant will have the same colors.
Furthermore, the window contains buttons:
Extend to the entire foundation, allows you to extend the Wikler constant to the entire plate.
When the button is clicked, the lower left point and upper right point fields
are automatically updated with the coordinates of the points they define
the maximum footprint of the foundation.
Generate polygon, allows you to automatically generate (through the definition of a few
parameters) a polygonal area with constant Winkler constant (polygon with number of points
greater than or equal to 3 or circular). Clicking on this button opens the window
Generate polygon in which you can set the parameters for generation
automatic.
If overlapping Winkler constant fields are defined, they will be in the overlap zone
considered the last defined Winkler constant.
Ex_1. A 10m
which is defined as a rectangular area 5m X 5m with Winkler's constant 5.0 kg/cm2/cm
will determine a stiffness of the installation surface which on the contour of the 5m x 5m area will have a stiffness of
3.0 kg/cm2/cm kg/cm2/cm.And In the center a stiffness Of 5.0

46
Ex_2. A rectangular area 10m

completely overlaps a with Winkler constant 3.0 kg/cm2/cm will determine a plate
with Winkler constant of 3.0 kg/cm2/cm.
7.9 Specific constraints

It is possible to access the List of punctual constraints window from the menu item of the same name
Geometry or from the graphic input window.
From the window it is possible to define the position and characteristics of the constraints (they can be rigid and/or
elastic) of the structure.
By clicking on the buttons
[Add], [Edit]
and [Delete] And
possible
respectively
add a new one
constraint or modify
and delete a
constraint existing.
When you add or

Yes
modify a constraint the Nodal Constraint Definition window opens where you can
define position, type of constraint and, for elastic constraints, stiffnesses.
7.9.1 Definition of nodal constraint
It is possible to access the Nodal Constraint Definition window by clicking on the [Add] or buttons
[Edit] of the Nodal Constraint List window.
– the position of the constraint (abscissa e
ordinate), expressed in [L1];
– the type of constraint:
• constraint on vertical translation;
• constraint on rotation around the X axis;
• constraint on rotation around the Y axis;
• constraint on translation in the X direction;
• constraint on translation in the Y direction.
The stiffness value is shown next to the type of constraint. The rigidity of the constraints to
translation are expressed in [F1 / L2], while the stiffnesses of the rotation constraints are expressed in
[F1 / ° ].
If you leave the value zero in the stiffness fields, the constraints will be considered rigid.
7.10 Continuous Constraints
The Continuous constraints list window can be accessed from the menu item of the same name
Geometry or from the graphic input window. The menu item is not active if the structure from
analyze consists of plinths or lattices of foundation beams and for the elevation lattices.
The window lists all the defined line constraints with position and characteristics of the lines
constraint.
a new constraint or edit and delete an existing line constraint. When you add or yes
edit a line constraint the Line Constraint Definition window opens in which it is
It is possible to define position, type of constraint and, for elastic line constraints, the stiffnesses.
7.10.1 Line constraint definition
You can access the Line Constraint Definition window by clicking on the [Add] or buttons
[Edit] of the Line Constraint List window.

48
– the position of the constraint (abscissa e

ordinate of the starting and ending points),
expressed in [L1];
– the type of constraint:
• constraint on vertical translation;
• constraint on rotation around the axis
X;
• constraint on rotation around the axis
Y;
• constraint on translation in the X direction;

• constraint on translation in the Y direction.
The stiffness value is shown next to the type of constraint. The rigidity of the constraints to
translation are expressed in [F1 / L2], while the stiffnesses of the rotation constraints are expressed in [F1 / ° ].
If you leave the value zero in the stiffness fields, the constraints will be considered rigid.
7.11 Structure information

The Structure Information window can be accessed from the Model menu item of the same name.
The following information is shown in the window:
–
the type of structure being analysed;
–
the footprint of the foundation, expressed in [L1];
–
the plan area of the foundation, expressed in
[L12];
–
the number of foundation piles;
–
the number of pillars;
–
the number of constraints;
–
the number of defined load conditions;
–
the number of combinations generated;
– the number of elements and nodes it has been in
divided the calculation model.
8 Graphic input
The insertion of geometric data (plate outline, piles, pillars, plinths, beams, constraints, etc.) can
can also be done graphically in a dedicated window, displayed under the Graphic input item
Graphics menu or button present on the command bar.
The graphic input window consists of a central part (with a white background) where the
input operations of the various objects and three bars arranged on the perimeter of the window (top, a
right and bottom) which allow you to manage the input and drawing phases. In an equivalent way the
functions that can be activated via the buttons on the aforementioned bars can be activated by the relevant ones
menu (in the Phases menu the functions of the upper bar can be activated, in the menu
Insert/Edit functions can be activated in the right bar and in the Tools menu
the functions in the bottom bar can be activated).
8.1 Menu and command bar Phases

Depending on the type of structure being analysed, in the phase bar (upper bar)
buttons will appear in the graphic input window that allow you to select the element
which must be entered.
plate beams pillars thickness constraints lines
plinths poles winkler constraints
It is possible to insert poles, beams, pillars, constraints, Winkler's constant and thicknesses only after having inserted
the outline of the audience or the plinths.
8.2 Insert/Edit menu and command bar

The vertical bar buttons allow inserting, deleting, moving, etc.
of the element selected from time to time:
Activate the insertion phase. The procedure to follow is: press the button, bring the
mouse pointer at the insertion point and left-click.
Activate the automatic generation phase. This option is active for the insertion of: outline
plate, constraints, beams, poles, pillars.

50
Allows you to view the window containing the list of elements inserted in the phase
current.
Activates the movement phase of the elements identified with a point or a line (vertex
plate, constraint, thickness vertices, beam, Winkler constant vertex, pillar, beam): it brings the
mouse pointer on the object to be moved and left-click and hold
pressed, drag it to the new position and release it. The coordinates of the
movement are shown on the bottom bar.
Activates the movement phase of the elements identified with a surface (polygon of the
plate, polygon that defines the thickness, polygon that defines the Winkler constant): yes
move the mouse pointer over the object to be moved and click with the left button and,
by keeping it pressed, you drag it to the new position and release it. The coordinates
of the movement are shown on the lower bar.
The button, active only in the phase of defining the outline of the plate, activates the phase
break side. The procedure to follow is: press the button, move the mouse pointer
on the side to be divided and left-click.
Allows you to modify the single vertex of the plate outline
Allows you to eliminate the single vertex of the plate outline
Activates the editing phase of the selected objects
Delete the selected items. It is equivalent to clicking the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
Copy and translate. The button displays the window that allows you to copy and/or translate the elements
selected objects
Activates the object query phase. The procedure to follow is: press the e button
move the mouse pointer to the question point. In the browse table
(Explore objects) the characteristics of the queried object will be reported Copy and translate
selected items
Activates the plinth/pillar manipulation phase, described later
Activates the single object selection phase. The selection is made by clicking with the mouse
on the object that is to be selected.
Activates the multiple object selection phase, in a rectangular area (box). The selection
occurs by moving the mouse pointer to the position of the first vertex of the rectangle
selection, then click and drag to the position of the second vertex and release the
mouse all the objects, belonging to the family of the currently chosen one, which will be
contained in the drawn area will be selected.
Activates the multiple object selection phase, in the polygonal area. The selection takes place
describing a polygon with the mouse, of which the last two sides intersect. At the
closure of the polygon all the elements that are currently part of the object's family
chosen will be selected.
Selection of all items displayed in the current stage.
Deselect all previously selected items.
8.3 Menu and tool command bar
The buttons in this bar respectively allow you to:

– activate zooms (plus, minus, window, dynamic and restore);
– activate movements (right, left, up and down);
– activate pan (dynamic movement). This function is activated automatically when you
click with the central mouse button and, keeping the button pressed, moves the mouse;
– set characters;
– set the background color;
– call help;
– set the grid;
– the type of selection. ;
– view active elements, allows you to view only the objects of the current phase
active;
– activate the measurement function. Once the button is activated, you can move the mouse in the drawing area and,
by clicking on two points it is possible to obtain the distance between them.
The horizontal SNAP management bar allows you to activate/deactivate:

– snap to the grid;
– object snapping;
– the representation of the grid;
– the object snap cursor.

52
8.4 Pop-up menus
Inside the Graphic Input window, clicking with the right mouse button displays a menu that allows
quick access to some functions.
The items contained in this menu are:

– Undo, allows you to cancel the last graphic operation performed.
– Draw concentrated loads, allows you to graphically represent concentrated loads too
in the graphical input. This representation could be useful during the insertion phase
geometry to understand where the loads are positioned relative to the geometry. Inside the
program you should define the geometry first and then the loads but, when inserting the
loads occurs through the import functions, the opposite happens: the loads are present
before geometry (especially concentrated loads).
– Optimal zoom, for optimal viewing of all objects contained in the work area.
8.5 Definition of audience contour

Contour insertion reference system
8.5.1 Contour graphic input
1. click on the plate outline button of the phase bar;

2. press the insert button on the Insert/Modify bar;
3. bring the mouse pointer close to the point and click. The insertion ends when
the polygon is closed. The insertion of vertices can be done by activating or not snapping e
it must take place counterclockwise. In the case of a multi-connected plant, the
external polygon and then internal ones.
To insert further points you can use the Break side item in the pop-up menu or the button
break side of vertical bar to the right. The procedure to follow once the voice has been activated
menu, is to bring the mouse pointer close to the insertion position and
left click.
8.5.2 Numerical management of input and modification of plate coordinates
1. click on the plate button on the top bar;

2. press the property list button on the vertical bar;
Through the Define Polygon window it is possible to numerically define the contours of the audience
(the external one and if the audience is multi-connected, the internal ones too).
The possible operations in the window are:

– Add point by clicking on
button a new line is inserted
in the grid, which allows you to set the
X and Y coordinates of the current point
– Delete point by clicking on
button you can delete the point
currently selected in the grid
Exiting the window with the button
accepts the imputed geometry comes
displayed in the Graphic Input window.
The display of the window precludes the graphical insertion of the contour.
8.5.3 Automatic generation of the audience contour
When inserting the outline graphic, by clicking on the generate button on the bar
Insert/Modify, the window that allows you to automatically define the geometry is displayed
of the contours.
It is possible to choose:
– Rectangular shape;
– Circular shape;
– Polygonal shape.
Depending on the form chosen, it is possible to define:
– number of sides
– Side length X, expressed in the unit [L1]

– Y side length, expressed in the unit [L1]
– Center coordinates of the polygon, expressed in units
[L1]
–
Rotation (positive clockwise), expressed
in unit [A]

54
8.6 Definition of plinths
8.6.1 Plinth graphic input
1. click on the plinths button on the Phases bar;

2. press the insert button on the Insert/Modify bar;
3. move the mouse pointer to the insertion position and click.
The Insert plinth window appears, in which you define the type of plinth.
8.6.2 Automatic generation of plinths
When graphically inserting the plinths, by clicking on

generate button on the Input/Edit bar, è
the window that allows you to define in appears
the position of the plinths themselves automatically.
Inside the window you can define:

– abscissa and ordinate of the starting point of
generation, expressed in [L1];
– center distance in the X and Y direction, expressed in [L1];
– number of plinths in the X and Y direction, expressed in [L1];

– if the rows are staggered compared to the starting point: lo
staggering of even and odd rows, expressed in
[L1];
– the type of plinth to be used in generation between
defined typologies.
If the plinths are connected by beams, selecting the Generate beams check will be created accordingly
automatic also the connection beams. In this case it is possible to define the type from
associate with the inserted beams.
8.6.3 Manipulate plinths
Once you have selected some plinths, through the window
Manipulate plinths you can perform the following operations:
– Merges plinths. This function allows you to blend
two plinths in one double collar. The operation
allows you to create a type of double plinth
collar whose size is the sum of the selected plinths.
The operation can only be performed on plinths

single collar.
– Transform plinths into pillars. This function allows you to transform plinths into pillars
transferring to these all the loads that were originally applied to the plinths (these come
eliminated). Following this operation, a plate must be built that incorporates the
pillars otherwise the loads are eliminated during the construction of the model.
– Transforms plinths into concentrated loads. This function allows you to transform plinths into
concentrated loads, eliminating the plinths. Following this operation it will have to be built
a plate that incorporates the loads that would otherwise be eliminated during the construction phase of the
model.
8.7 Definition of punctual constraints
8.7.1 Point constraints graph input
1. click on the punctual constraints button on the top bar;
2. press the insert button on the vertical bar;
3. move the mouse pointer to the insertion position and click.

The Nodal Constraint window appears , in which the type of constraint is defined.
To move, delete and modify the inserted constraint, use the relevant buttons on the toolbar
vertical previously described.
The drawing is managed using the buttons on the lower horizontal bar
8.7.2 Automatic generation of point constraints
During the graphic insertion of the constraints, by clicking on the generate button on the toolbar
Insertion/Modification, the window that allows you to automatically define the position is displayed
of constraints.
It is possible to generate constraints on a grid (Grid Generation) or on a circumference
(Generation on circumference).

56
If you carry out a generation on the grid you must

to define:
– Abscissa starting point, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Initial point ordinate, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Distance between centers in the X direction, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Center distance Y direction, expressed in the unit [L1].

If the rows are staggered:
– Even file offset, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Odd file offset, expressed in the unit [L1].
If you perform a generation on a circumference
you need to define:
– Center abscissa, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Center ordinate, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Diameter of the circumference, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Number of constraints to generate.
Through the beam intersection, contour vertices and beam ends checks, the program is communicated
want to generate constraints also at these notable points.
Constraint type: V translation, X rotation, Y rotation, X translation, Y translation
8.8 Definition of continuous constraints
8.8.1 Continuous constraints graph input
1. click on the continuous constraint button on the top bar;
bring the mouse pointer to the initial insertion position and click, move the pointer
mouse to the final position and click. While moving, the track of the will be displayed
constraint.
The Continuous Constraint window appears, where you define the type of constraint.
To move, delete and modify the inserted constraint, use the relevant buttons on the toolbar
vertical previously described.
8.9 Definition of thicknesses
8.9.1 Thickness graphic input
1. click on the thickness button on the top bar;

3. use the mouse to delimit the area to which the current thickness is to be attributed. It is possible to define a
polygon of a generic shape simply by clicking the mouse on the vertices that describe it, or a polygon of a
rectangular shape by moving the mouse pointer to the position of the first
vertex of the selection rectangle, then click and drag to the position of the second vertex.
The Thickness window appears .
To move, delete and modify the inserted thickness, use the relevant buttons on the toolbar
vertical.
8.10 Definition of Winkler constant
8.10.1 Winkler constant graphical input
1. click on the Winkler constant button on the top bar;

3. use the mouse to delimit the area to which the current property can be attributed. It is possible to define a
polygon of generic shape simply by clicking on the vertices that describe it,
or a rectangular polygon by moving the mouse pointer to the first position
vertex of the selection rectangle, then click and drag to the position of the second vertex. When you release
the mouse, the Winkler Constant table appears .
To move, delete and modify the inserted element, use the relevant buttons on the bar
vertical.
The drawing is managed using the buttons on the lower horizontal bar.

58
8.11 Definition of poles
8.11.1 Pile graph input
1. click on the poles button on the top bar;
3. move the mouse pointer to the insertion position and click. The is displayed
Pole window.
To move, delete and modify the inserted pole, use the relevant buttons on the toolbar
vertical.
8.11.2 Automatic pile generation
When graphically inserting the poles, by clicking on the generate button in the graphic input window, it is
the window that allows you to automatically define the position of the poles is displayed.
It is possible to generate poles on a grid (Generation on grid), on a circumference
(Generation on circumference), on beams or plinths

to define:

– Odd file offset, expressed in the unit [L1];
you need to define:
– Center abscissa X, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Y center ordinate, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Number of poles.
If you carry out a generation on beams you must define:
– Local initial abscissa, expressed in the unit [L1];

– Number of poles
By checking Beam Intersection you tell the program to insert poles into those too
notable points.
In the Pile Geometry section, the characteristics of the generated piles are defined.
– The type of pole to use
For circular posts in ca
– Pile diameter, expressed in the unit [L2]
– Length of poles, expressed in units [L1]
For generic poles:

– Pile diameter, expressed in the unit [L2]
– Length of poles, expressed in units [L1]
– Area, expressed in the unit [L2]2
– Inertia, expressed in the unit [L2]4
– Resistance modulus, expressed in the unit [L2]3
– Ultimate moment, expressed in the unit [F1] x [L1]
8.12 Definition of pillars
8.12.1 Column graphic input
1. click on the pillars button on the top bar;

3. move the mouse pointer to the insertion position and click. The is displayed
Pillar window .
To move, delete and modify the inserted pillar, use the relevant buttons on the bar
vertical.
8.12.2 Automatic column generation
When graphically inserting the pillars, click on the generate button in the graphics window
input, the window that allows you to automatically define the position of the pillars is displayed.
It is possible to generate pillars on a grid (Generation on grid) or on a circumference (Generation on
circumference).

60

to define:

– Odd file offset, expressed in units
[L1].
you need to define:
– Number of pillars.
Activating the Beam intersection check tells the program to generate the pillars at the points
notable defined by the intersection of the beams.
In the Pillar Geometry section you define:

–
Pillar base in X direction, expressed in unit [L2];
–
Pillar base in Y direction, expressed in unit [L2].
From the Glass selector the program is informed that the generated pillars are placed in the
glass.
8.12.3 Manipulate pillars
Once you have selected some pillars, through the window
Manipulate pillars you can perform the following
operations:
– Transforms into concentrated loads. This function
allows you to transform the selected columns into loads
concentrate, eliminating the pillars themselves.

8.13 Definition of beams
8.13.1 Beam graphic input
1. click on the beam button on the top bar;
3. move the mouse pointer to the first point and click with the left button. At this point yes
move the pointer to the second point and click again. The insertion is made evident by the
trace of the beam that follows the movements of the mouse pointer. The inserted connection beam has the characteristics
assigned by default which can be modified in the table
which appears when you release the mouse.
To move, delete and modify the inserted beam, use the relevant buttons on the toolbar
vertical.
8.13.2 Automatic generation of beams
When graphically inserting the beams, by clicking on the generate button in the graphics window
input, the window that allows you to automatically define the position of the beams is displayed.
It is possible to generate beams in the horizontal direction (coinciding with the X axis), vertical direction
(coinciding with the Y axis) or on the edge (for the stalls).
I check Generate beams vertical direction e
Generates horizontal direction beams communicate
to the program you want to generate the beams in
vertical and/or horizontal direction, following the
specifications below:
– Abscissa/Ordinate starting point, expressed
in unit [L1];
– Center distance direction, expressed in the unit [L1];
– Length, expressed in [L1]

– Number of beams
– Type
– Installation plan, expressed in [L1]
Through the checks Generate beam end constraints and Generate beam intersection constraints you communicate the
programs the intent to place constraints at the specified notable points.

62
8.14 Grid and snap definition
The window appears when you click the Grid/Snap button on the toolbar
or when you select the Grid/Snap item from the Tools menu.
The window allows you to:
–
Activate grid drawing;
– Whether the grid must be drawn by points or lines;

–
activate/deactivate coordinate snapping;
–
set the pitch the X and Y direction, expressed
in [L1];
–
activate/deactivate snapping to notable points;
–
object snap tolerances on points e
lines
–
selection distance tolerance, expressed in [L1],
precision of the click area during the selection phase
objects. The object is sampled if it is located at a
distance less than or equal to the defined distance..
8.15 View Options
The window appears when you click the button
Toolbar display options.

The window allows you to activate editing functions
of the geometry (drag posts with beams, delete posts with
beams, delete concentrated loads with beams, drag constraints
with beams, delete constraints with beams, drag piles with plinths,
delete posts with plinths and drag beams with plinths) and set
the numbering of the elements present (poles, pillars, beams,
plinths and vertices).

9 Loads Menu
The menu allows you to access the main windows
for inserting the loads acting on the structure. The figure shows the
menu items that follow
will be better specified.
The Load Management item present in all windows allows access to a menu for the
load manipulation: import from file, modify sign, copy/paste, etc.
9.1 Distributed loads
The Distributed Loads grid is accessed from the Loads menu item of the same name or from the input window
load graph.
The table shows the main characteristics of the distributed loads that can be applied in a
any position on the audience.
To add new loads and modify existing loads, just click on respectively
[Add] or [Edit] buttons. The Distributed Load window opens in which it is
possible to define:
Xis Abscissa of the lower left point of the load area with respect to the system [L1]
global reference;
Yis Ordinate of the lower left point of the loading area with respect to the system [L1]
global reference;
Xsd Abscissa of the upper right point of the load area with respect to the system [L1]

64
global reference;
Ysd Ordinate of the upper right point of the load area with respect to the system [L1]
global reference;
Qz1 Vertical component 1 at the load area, positive if [F1] / [L1]2
facing downwards;
Qz2 Vertical component 2 in correspondence with the load area, positive if [F1] / [L1]2
facing downwards;
Qz3 Vertical component 3 in correspondence with the load area, positive if [F1] / [L1]2
facing downwards;
Qx Component of the load in the (X,Y) plane. The load per unit area has the [F1] / [L1]2
direction and the direction of the X axis of the reference system of Cartesian axes
global;
Qy Component of the load in the plane (X, Y) The load per unit area has the [F1] / [L1]2
direction and the direction of the Y axis of the reference system of Cartesian axes
global;
The component corresponding to the fourth point that delimits the load area is calculated in
automatic by the program.
Furthermore, the following are present in the window
buttons:
It allows you to extend the load to the entire room
plate (when the button is clicked the edit fields
are automatically updated with the
coordinates of the points they define
the maximum size of the foundation);
[Input for resultant >>], allows you to define the load
distributed as resultant and not as pressure.
Exiting the window with the Accept button, the load
defined as resulting is transformed into
pressures and reported in the appropriate Qz1 boxes,
Qz2, Qz3 and Qz4.
Below is the convention of the signs of the components (Qz1, Qz2, Qz3, Qz4, Qx, Qy) of
distributed load.
NOTE
The load components (Qz1, Qz2, Qz3, Qz4, Qx, Qy) are relative to the reference system
global.
To delete an existing load, you need to highlight the row of the load to be deleted and then
press the [Delete] button.
Using the [<<] and [>>] buttons you can scroll and define multiple load conditions.
9.2 Concentrated loads

The Concentrated loads grid can be accessed from the item of the same name in the Loads menu or from the window
graphic input of loads.

66
The table displays the characteristics of concentrated loads that can be applied in a
any position on the audience. The data reported are:

X Abscissa of the load application point. [L1]
Y Ordinate of the point of application of the load. [L1]
Object The object on which the load is applied (platea, trvae)

Fz Value of the vertical component of the load, positive if facing towards [F1]
Bass.
Mx Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector Mx has the [F1] x [L1]
direction and direction of the X axis of a reference system of axes
Cartesians.
My Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector My has the [F1] x [L1]
direction and direction of the Y axis of a reference system of axes
Cartesians.
Fx Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fx has the direction [F1]
and the direction of the X axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes.
Fy Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fy has the direction [F1]
and the direction of the Y axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes.
Using the [<<] and [>>] buttons you can scroll and define the load conditions.
To add new loads and delete an existing load, just click on respectively
[Add] and [Delete] buttons
NOTE
The load components (Fz, Mx, My, Fx, Fy) are relative to the global reference system.
9.3 Load lines

The Load Lines grid is accessed from the Loads menu item of the same name or from the input window
load graph.
The table displays the load line characteristics that can be applied in one
any position on the audience. The quantities shown in the window are:
No Load line order number
Xi, Yi Initial abscissa and ordinate of the load line; [L1]
Xf, Yf Abscissa and final ordinate of the load line; [L1]
Fz Value of the vertical component of the load, positive if facing towards [F1] / [L1]

68
the bass.
Mx Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector ([F1] x [L1]) / [L1]
Mx has the direction and direction of the X axis of a reference system
of Cartesian axes.
My Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector ([F1] x [L1]) / [L1]
My has the direction and direction of the Y axis of a reference system

of Cartesian axes.
Fx Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fx has the [F1] / [L1]
Cartesians.
Fy Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fy has the [F1] / [L1]
Cartesians.
Below is the convention of the signs of the components (Fz, Mx, My, Fx, Fy) of the line
load.
NOTE
The load components (Fz, Mx, My, Fx, Fy) of the load line refer to the unit of length
of the line.
9.4 Pillar loads
The Column Loads grid is accessed from the Loads menu item of the same name or from the input window
load graph.
The table displays the loads applied on the columns.

The data reported are:
No Pillar order number;
Xp, Yp Abscissa and Ordinate of the pillar with respect to the global reference system; [L1]
Fz Value of the vertical component of the load, positive if facing towards [F1]
Bass.

70
Mx Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector Mx [F1] x [L1]
has the direction and direction of the X axis of a reference system of axes
Cartesians.
My Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector My [F1] x [L1]
has the direction and direction of the Y axis of a reference system of axes
Cartesians.
Fx Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fx has the [F1]
Cartesians.
Fy Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fy has the [F1]
Cartesians.
NOTE
9.5 Beam linear loads
The List of beam loads grid can be accessed from the item of the same name in the Loads menu or from the window
graphic input of loads.
The table displays the characteristics of the linear loads on the beams that can be applied in one
any position on the beam itself. The quantities shown in the window are:
No Beam load order number;
Beam no. Beam identifier;
Xi, Xf Initial and final abscissa of the load on the beam in the reference system [L1]
local to the beam itself;

Vertical load (fz)
(fz)i, (fz)f Vertical load at the initial and final abscissa, positive if pointing downwards. [F1] / [L1]
Load parallel to beam axis (fx)
(fx)i, (fx)f Load parallel to the beam axis at the initial abscissa and [F1] / [L1]
the final. The load has direction x in the local reference system of the beam e
positive direction if directed from i to f;
Orthogonal load on beam axis (fy)
(fy)i, (fy)f Load orthogonal to the beam axis at the initial abscissa [F1] / [L1]
and final. The load has a y direction in the local reference system of the beam e
positive direction according to a system of Cartesian axes;
Below is the convention of the signs of the components (fz, fx, fy) of the beam load.

72
NOTE
The load components (fz, fx, fy) of the beam load are referred to the unit length of the beam
itself.
The load components (fz, fx, fy) are relative to the local reference system of the beam with axis
x in the direction of the beam and positive direction from i to f and y axis orthogonal to x to form
a Cartesian system.
9.6 Importing loads
Through the “Load management” menu, present in the concentrated load management tables,
pillars and plinths, it is possible to directly import the loads onto the foundation using the formats already
described in the previous chapters.
9.7 Loading conditions
The Condition List window is accessed
from the Loads menu item of the same name.
The window displays the list of conditions
defined. In the window you can change or
eliminate the condition.
The symbol [IM] in the first column indicates that the
condition was important from file (txt to another).
This information will be used in the
generation of combinations.
At the bottom of the window are listed
resulting from the load components, positive,
negative and total, for the selected condition:

ÿ
Fz, vertical loads;

ÿ
Fx, horizontal loads in the X direction;
Fy, horizontal loads in Y direction;

ÿ
Mx, moments with vector axis the X axis;
My, moments with vector axis the Y axis.

ÿ
9.7.1 Load condition specifications
In the window you can define for the condition:
- the name. The default program assigns the name "Condition" followed by an index;
– the Type, to be chosen between permanent, permanent non-structural, variable and variable due to traffic;
– the Group Index. For variable and variable traffic conditions it is possible to attribute this
index that allows you to manage non-concomitant load conditions. The conditions they have
group index other than zero can be combined with all conditions that have the same
index and with conditions that have index zero. Conditions with a zero group index can
be combined with all other conditions;
– participation or otherwise in the earthquake
– the coeffs. of combination (Y0, Y1 and Y2), chosen from those that can be defined
manually or imported automatically by clicking on the Import button which displays the
window below.

74
9.8 Load combinations
Loads are defined by the User by conditions. They can be in any load condition
inserted distributed loads concentrated loads unloaded pillars, etc.. A load condition
in practice it represents one or more loads that can be treated as a whole (they can for example
example be present or not in a load combination) or be defined as permanent
or variables (accidental according to the traditional wording in use in Italy).
The loads defined in the various conditions will be taken into account in the analysis only if they are inserted
in load combinations. A load combination is the "sum" of multiple load conditions: the
load conditions inserted in the same combination will act simultaneously (possibly
with different participation coefficient).
The Load combinations window can be accessed from the Loads or menu item of the same name
via the button on the command bar. In this window you define the
load combinations, choosing the load conditions that belong to each one
of them. All user-defined load conditions are shown in the Conditions column
defined.
Clicking on the Combination Management item displays a menu containing the following
voices:
Generates Automatic generation of load combinations. There

generation of the number of combinations is a function of the number of

conditions, of the type (permanent or accidental), and of the Regulations
set.
Add Combination Adding an empty combination to the queue.

Enter combination Inserting an empty combination before the current one
Delete combination Deleting the current combination
Erase everything Deletion of all defined combinations
Close Exit the Load Combinations window
To define the load combinations the procedure to follow is the following:

• the combination is created using the [Add combination] button
• the load condition is added, currently selected in the Conditions column,
via the [Add condition>>] button.
The Sisma
current combination.
The spell-ups to the right of the Combination No. edit allow you to scroll through the defined combinations.
The selected combination becomes the active one.
Deleting a condition from the combination occurs via the [<<Remove] button.
The condition that will be eliminated is the one selected in the Combinations no. column.
The definition of the participation coefficients occurs via the [Participation] button.
The Participation Coefficients table is displayed showing:

ÿ
the condition identifier.
ÿ
the names of the individual load conditions belonging to the combination,
ÿ the action, favorable/unfavorable

ÿ the participation coefficients of the conditions.
9.8.1 Generation options

76
The window allows you to define a series of parameters for the automatic generation of
load combinations.
1) Elementary conditions
The defined conditions are appropriately combined depending on the type (permanent or
variable), the regulations set and the options activated.
2) Conditions as combinations
By activating this option you inform the program that the load combinations coincide with
the loading conditions. This is the case in which in the conditions we have inserted (also through
import from external file) the structure drains already appropriately combined.
It is necessary to add to these combinations only the weight of the foundation itself, the generation
automatic takes care of this.
3) Conditions imported as combinations

By activating this option you inform the program that the load conditions are imported
coincide with the combinations, while the defining conditions will in turn be combined.
Each imported condition will be assigned a different and negative group index.
Generally, for the foundation, it is not necessary to insert the earthquake.

Allowable Stress Method
1. generation of combinations with earthquake in X direction

2. generation of combinations with earthquake in Y direction
3. generation of combinations in numbers equal to the defined conditions
If this option is not set, the generation method is combinatorial: if nv is the number
of the accidental load conditions the combinatorial method generates 2nv-1 +1 load combinations
(static).
For example, having defined 3 variable (or accidental) conditions V1, V2, V3 (with coefficients of
participation equal to ÿ1, ÿ2, ÿ3), and a permanent condition P0 (participation coefficient
ÿ0) we will have the following 7 + 1 combinations:

ÿ0P1
ÿ0P1 + ÿ1V1 + ÿ2V2 + ÿ3V3
ÿ0P1 + ÿ 1V1 + ÿ2V2
ÿ0P1 + ÿ1V1 + ÿ3V3
ÿ0P1 + ÿ 2V2 + ÿ3V3
ÿ0P1 + ÿ1V1
ÿ0P1 + ÿ 2V2
ÿ0P1 + ÿ 3V3
Limit State Method

1. generation of combinations with earthquake in X direction
2. generation of combinations with earthquake in Y direction
3. generation of combinations in numbers equal to the defined conditions
4. generation of Ultimate Limit State combinations
5. generation of Operational Limit State combinations: rare combinations, combinations
frequent, almost permanent combinations
SLU
If you set option 4 if nv is the number of accidental load conditions you have 2*nv
load combinations (static).
For example, having defined 2 variable (or accidental) conditions V1, V2 and one condition
permanent P1 we will have the following 4 combinations:
Combination 1
P1G ÿ + ÿ + QV1
ÿ Qÿ0V2
ÿ G+P1ÿ QV2
+ ÿ Qÿ0V1
Combination 2
ÿ G+P1ÿ + ÿQV1 Qÿ0V2
ÿ G+P1
ÿ +QV2
ÿ Qÿ0V1
SLE
If you set option 5 if nv is the number of accidental load conditions you have:
1 quasi-permanent load combination.

78
nv rare load combinations
nv frequent load combinations
For example, having defined 2 variable (or accidental) conditions V1, V2 and one condition
permanent P1 we will have:
ÿG
+P1
ÿ Qÿ2V1 Qÿ2V2
+ÿ
almost permanent
ÿG
+ P1
ÿ Qÿ1V1 Qÿ2V2
+ÿ
frequent
ÿG
+ P1
ÿ Qÿ1V2 Qÿ2V1
+ÿ
ÿG
+P1
ÿ + ÿ QV1 Qÿ0V2
rare
ÿ G P1 + ÿQV2 + Qÿ0V1
ÿ
By activating the generation by limit states (ultimate or operational) the participation coefficient
attributed to the condition is the product of the partial safety coefficient by the coefficient of
combination, defined in the Safety Coefficients table.
Number of combinations actually generated
The number of combinations generated depends on the number of variable (accidental) conditions and the
request for generation of seismic combinations. It also depends on the regulations set e
from the set design method. In the case in which we set the earthquake X and the earthquake Y the number
of the generated combinations is multiplied by five.
In fact, if nc is the number of static combinations generated, we will have:
nc (static) + nc (earthquake X+ / earthquake Y+) + nc (earthquake X+ / earthquake Y-) +
nc (earthquake X- / earthquake Y+) + nc (earthquake X- / earthquake Y-) = 5xnc

9.9 List of combinations
It is possible to call up the List window
combinations, recalling it from the homonym

Loads menu item.
The first column reports the list of
defined combinations (A1-M1 combination
at the ultimate limit state, SLEQ combination
almost at the serviceability limit state
permanent, etc.).
The horizontal Sisma X and Sisma columns
horizontal Y indicate whether the combination is
seismic and direction.
The [Delete Combination] button allows

to delete from the combination list
define a combination.
In the lower part of the window there is a further list containing the list of
conditions of the combination with the coeffs. of participation applied.
The [Delete condition] button allows you to delete the condition from the current combination
selected.

80
9.10 Combination details
The window contains two tables. The first shows the list of combinations defined while
the second shows the results of the five load components (Fz, Fx, Fy, Mx and My)
of the combination. Of the combination, the sum of only the defined loads (affected by the participation coefficients)
is reported.
The contribution of the own weight and any other loads that can be assessed in the calculation phase is missing
(weight of the soil on the foundation, weight of the glass, etc.).

10 Load graph input
The insertion of loads (concentrated, distributed, pillar loads, etc.) can also take place
graphically in a dedicated window, displayed from the Load Input item of the Graphics menu or from
button present on the command bar.

The load graph input window consists of a central part (with a white background) where
the input operations of the various objects take place and from three bars arranged on the perimeter of the window
(top, right and bottom) which allow you to manage the load input and drawing phases. In an equivalent
manner, the functions can be activated via the accelerator buttons on the aforementioned bars
can be activated from the relevant menus (the bar functions can be activated in the Phases menu
top, the functions in the right bar and in the menu can be activated in the Insert/Edit menu
Tools the functions in the bottom bar can be activated).
Depending on the type of structure being analysed, buttons will appear in the upper bar (phase bar) of
the load input window that allow you to select the load that
must be entered.
Description of the buttons
Distributed load Concentrated load (on plate or beams)
Load line Pillar load
Beam load Plinth load
10.2 Menu and command bar Insert / Edit

The vertical bar buttons allow inserting, deleting, moving, etc.
of the element selected from time to time:
Activate the insertion phase. The procedure to follow is: press the button, bring the
mouse pointer at the insertion point and left-click.
Activates the automatic load generation phase.
Activates the editing phase of the selected objects.
Activates the phase of moving the elements identified with a point or a line: the
mouse pointer on the object to be moved and left-click and hold

82
pressed, drag it to the new position and release it. The coordinates of the
movement are shown on the bottom bar.
Allows you to view the window containing the list of elements inserted in the phase
current.
Activates the single object selection phase. The selection is made by clicking with the mouse
on the object that is to be selected.
selection, then click and drag to the position of the second vertex and release the
mouse all the objects, belonging to the family of the currently chosen one, which will be
describing a polygon with the mouse, of which the last two sides intersect. At the
closure of the polygon all the elements that are currently part of the object's family
chosen, they will be selected.
Copy and translate selected elements.
Delete the selected items. It is equivalent to clicking the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
Activates the object query phase. The procedure to follow is: press the e button
move the mouse pointer to the question point. The characteristics of the queried object will be shown
in the exploration table (Explore objects).

– set characters;
– call help;
– set the grid;
To define and scroll through the load conditions, use the buttons on the bar below.
10.4 Pop-up menus

The pop-up menu can be activated by right-clicking inside the window
load graph input. The voices allow you to quickly activate some functions.
The Copy loads command allows you to copy all the loads of the active phase
of the current condition in the same or other conditions.
The Paste Loads command allows you to paste loads previously
copied.
The Undo command allows you to undo the latest operations performed.
The delete condition loads item allows you to delete all the loads of the current condition,
after selecting which types of load.
From the list item, the <Loads> window is displayed which shows all the loads inserted with the relevant ones
associated condition. The delete button allows you to delete the loads.

84
10.5 Definition of distributed loads
10.5.1 Distributed load graphic input
1. click on the distributed loads button on the phase bar;
2. press the Insert button on the toolbar
Insertion/Modification;
3. Move the mouse pointer to the position of
first vertex of the selection rectangle, then click
with the left mouse button and drag into the
position of the second vertex, thus releasing the
mouse. The Distributed Load window appears
from which it is possible to set the load value.
For the description of the input window, yes
refer to the previous chapter in the description
of the numerical input of the distributed load.
10.5.2 Distributed load generation
During the graphic insertion of the distributed loads, by clicking on the generate button in the window
load input, the window that allows you to automatically define the position of the loads is displayed
distributed and the extent of the load.
It is possible to generate loads on one
grill.
The parameters to be defined are:
Abscissa and ordinate starting point

ÿ
(X1; Y1), expressed in [L1];
X and Y direction center distance (ÿX;

ÿ
ÿY), expressed in [L1];
X and Y side load footprint (Bx;

ÿ
By), expressed in [L1];
the resultant of the load in terms of normal stress, shears in the X and Y directions and moments with
ÿ
vector axis the X and Y axes.

10.6 Definition of concentrated loads
10.6.1 Concentrated load graphic input
1. click on the button load
phase bar concentrate;
2. press the insert button of the
Insert/Edit bar;
3. Move the mouse pointer to the
insertion position and click. He comes

displayed there window Load
Concentrated.
NOTE
The quantities to be defined are:
X Abscissa of the load application point. [L1]
Y Ordinate of the load application point. [L1]

86
Fz Value of the vertical component of the load, positive if facing downwards. [F1]
Mx Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector Mx has [F1] x [L1]
direction and direction of the X axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes.
My Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector My has [F1] x [L1]
direction and direction of the Y axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes.
Fx Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fx has the direction ed [F1]
the direction of the X axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes.
Fy Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fy has the direction ed [F1]
the direction of the Y axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes.
10.6.2 Generation of concentrated loads
During the graphic insertion phase of the concentrated loads, by clicking on the generate button, it is displayed
the window that allows you to automatically define the position and extent of concentrated loads.
It is possible to generate concentrated loads on a grid (Generation on grid), on one
circumference (Generation on circumference) or on beams.
If you perform a grid generation
you need to define:
– Abscissa initial point, expressed
in unit [L1];
– Initial point ordinate, expressed
in unit [L1];
– Center distance X direction, expressed
in unit [L1];
– Center distance Y direction, expressed
in the [L1] unit.
– Odd file offset, expressed in the unit [L1].
The generation creates a series of loads of equal magnitude that originate at the starting point e
they cover the entire structure.
If you carry out a generation on a circumference you must define:

– Number of loads.
The generation creates a series of loads of equal magnitude that develop on a circumference if
the Apply as resulting option is disabled; while it creates a series of loads of different magnitude if
the option is activated.
In this case the program transforms the moments into normal tensile and compressive stresses
applied at a distance equal to the radius of the circumference.
If the generation occurs on beams it is possible to define:
– the abscissa of the first load with respect to the local reference system of the beam, expressed in [L1];
– the wheelbase, expressed in [L1];
– the load components in terms of normal stress, shears in the X and Y directions and moments with
vector axis the X and Y axes.
The generation will create a series of equal loads originating at the starting point e
they cover the entire beam.
10.7 Definition of load line
10.7.1 Load line graphic input
1. click on the load line button on the phase bar;
2. press the Insert button on the toolbar
3. move the mouse pointer to the insertion position

and click. The Concentrated Load window appears.
NOTE
The load components (Fz, Mx, My, Fx, Fy) of the load line refer to the unit of length
of the line.

88

No Load line order number
Xi Initial abscissa of the load line; [L1]

Yi Initial ordinate of the load line; [L1]
Xf Final abscissa of the load line; [L1]
Yf Final ordinate of the load line; [L1]
Fz Value of the vertical component of the load, positive if facing towards [F1] / [L1]
the bass.
Mx Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector ([F1] x [L1]) / [L1]
Mx has the direction and direction of the X axis of a reference system
of Cartesian axes.
My Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector ([F1] x [L1]) / [L1]
My has the direction and direction of the Y axis of a reference system

of Cartesian axes.
Fx Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fx has the [F1] / [L1]
Cartesians.
Fy Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fy has the [F1] / [L1]
Cartesians.
Below is the convention of the signs of the components (Fz, Mx, My, Fx, Fy) of the line
load.
10.8 Definition of pillar loads
10.8.1 Column load graphic input
1. click on the Column loads button

of the upper bar;
2. Press the Insert button
vertical bar on the right;
3. Move the mouse pointer in
near a pillar and click. He comes
the Column Load window appears .
NOTE

90

Fz Value of the vertical component of the load, positive if facing downwards; [L1]
Mx Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector Mx has [F1] x [L1]
direction and direction of the X axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes;
My Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector My has [F1] x [L1]
direction and direction of the Y axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes;
Fx Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fx has the direction ed [F1]
the direction of the X axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes;
Fy Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fy has the direction ed [F1]
the direction of the Y axis of a reference system of Cartesian axes.
10.9 Definition of beam distributed load
10.9.1 Beam distributed load graphic input
1. click on the Beam Load button
of the phase bar;
2. press the Insert button of the
Insert/Edit bar;
3. Move the mouse pointer in
proximity to the beam and click. He comes

displayed there Load window
distributed beam, in which it comes
the beam identifier ei is reported
starting and ending points of the same.
NOTE
The load components (fz, fx, fy) of the beam load are referred to the unit length of the beam
itself.
The load components (fz, fx, fy) are relative to the local reference system of the beam with axis
x in the direction of the beam and positive direction from i to f and y axis orthogonal to x to form
a Cartesian system.
Xi, Xf Initial and final abscissa of the load on the beam in the reference system [L1]
local to the beam itself;
Vertical load (fz)
(fz)i, (fz)f Vertical load at the initial and final abscissa, positive if pointing downwards. [F1] / [L1]
Load parallel to beam axis (fx)
(fx)i, (fx)f Load parallel to the beam axis at the initial abscissa and [F1] / [L1]
the final. The load has direction x in the local reference system of the beam e
positive direction if directed from i to f;
Orthogonal load on beam axis (fy)
(fy)i, (fy)f Load orthogonal to the beam axis at the initial abscissa [F1] / [L1]
and final. The load has a y direction in the local reference system of the beam e
positive direction according to a system of Cartesian axes;
Below is the convention of the signs of the components (fz, fx, fy) of the beam load.

ninety two
10.10 Plinth load definition
10.10.1 Plinth load graphic input
1. click on the Plinth load button on the phase bar;
2. press the Insert button

from the bar Of
3. Move the pointer
mouse near the plinth e

click. The is displayed
Plinth Load window. In
function of where you clicked
in the window header
the identification number is reported
plinth and collar.
NOTE

Fz Value of the vertical component of the load, positive if facing towards [L1]
Bass.
Mx, My Value of the moment component of the load. The moment vector Mx [F1] x [L1]
has the direction and direction of the X axis of a reference system of axes
Cartesians. The moment vector My has the direction and direction of the Y axis
of a reference system of Cartesian axes.
Fx, Fy Value of the horizontal component of the load. The vector Fx has the [F1]
Cartesians. The vector Fy has the direction and direction of the Y axis of a
reference system of Cartesian axes.
11 Model Menu
The menu contains the commands necessary for setup, generation and operations
Mesh view.
NOTE:
When mesh generation starts, the program automatically launches the Options window
mesh generation, which allows you to define the type of mesh to generate, the number of elements and the
mesh thickening factors for slab structures.
11.1 Check data
The menu item allows you to start a data consistency check phase before moving on
to model generation
11.2 Plate model options
The FEM analysis options window can be accessed from the item of the same name in the Model menu. There
menu item is active only when calculating a plate for plate analysis.
It is possible to set the type of element to choose between:

94
– CST (Constant Strain Triangle) – 3-node triangular with constant deformation;
– LST (Linear Strain Triangle) – 6-node triangular with linear deformation;
– ALLMAN – 3-node triangular with “Drilling”
– Q4 – 4-node bilinear quadrangular;
– Q8 – 8-node serendipity quad.
For the description of the elements mentioned, please refer to the theoretical references.
11.3 Mesh generation options

You can access the Mesh Generation Options window when you start mesh generation
calculation model.

– the shape of the element chosen from
triangular and quadrangular elements

– if the element is deformable
cutting
–
the type of mesh. Choice can
be carried out between structured triangular,
triangular unstructured, classical or
polygonal
– the number of elements in the X direction e
Y. The default program proposes a
subdivision with a step of one meter (e.g.
audience 26 m × 16 m ÿ number of elements
26, Y = 16);
– size reduction factors
of the elements. These factors can be
set:
–
in correspondence with concave edges;
–
around internal polygons;
–
in correspondence with concentrated loads;
–
in correspondence with the constraints and poles;
–
along the axis of the beams.
At the end of the mesh generation the program
opens the Mesh Characteristics window in which
the following are reported: the number of elements and the number
of nodes generated in the model.
For the plinths the program always adopts an element with shearing deformability.
11.4 Check mesh
After the generation of the model it is possible to start a further check phase that reports
any anomalies (nodes too close, etc):
Example:
Ribbed plate Bx = 5 m and By = 5 m.
Number of elements per model generation in the X = 5 and Y = 5 direction.
Leaving the number of elements unchanged and changing the dimensions of the elements along the axis
of the beams (from 1 m to 0.5 m) we obtain:
size of the elements size of the elements
along the axis of the beams 1.00 m along the axis of the beams 0.50 m
By changing the number of elements (from 5 × 5 to 10 × 10) and leaving the dimensions of the elements unchanged
elements along the axis of the beams (from 1 m to 0.5 m) we obtain:

96
Number of elements 5 × 5 Number of elements 10 × 10
12 Graphics Model
The Model Graphics window can be accessed from the Graphics menu item of the same name or from the button
command bar .
The mesh is automatically generated by the program based on the entities inserted (loads,
constraints, poles, etc), and the number of elements (in the X and Y direction) that the user can set in the
Mesh Generation Options window.
Changing node and element properties is completely canceled when
the mesh is reset or regenerated.
Example:
If you constrain the nodes of the mesh and then regenerate the mesh itself, it will no longer be present on the nodes
no constraints. The same goes for the other elements (nodal loads, element loads, etc).
The mesh is reset when, from the numeric input windows or from the graphic input window
geometry and loads, insert, modify or delete geometry, poles, pillars, beams, constraints,
thicknesses, Winkler constant, concentrated loads and distributed loads.

The buttons on the top bar allow you to view and modify the properties of individual nodes
and/or elements:
Description of the buttons
Plate outline Constraints
Thicknesses Winkler constant
Nodal loads Load items
12.2 Insert/Edit menu and command bar

The buttons on the vertical bar allow you to select the objects you want from time to time
modify:
Activates the single object selection phase. The selection occurs by clicking with the mouse on the
object that must be selected.
selection, then click and drag to the position of the second vertex and when you release the mouse
all the objects, belonging to the family of the one currently chosen, which will be
describing a polygon with the mouse, of which the last two sides intersect. When the polygon is
closed, all the elements that are currently part of the object's family
chosen, they will be selected.
Set properties to selected items.
Allows you to view the window containing the list of elements and nodes present

98
Allows you to query the nodes of the mesh
Allows you to query mesh elements
Once the objects (nodes or elements) have been selected, by clicking on the Edit button you can open the
related window and edit the selected entities.
If the selected objects are nodes you can edit

–
Node load components
– Constraints on the node
If the selected objects are elements you can edit

– Loads on the element
–
Thickness and Winkler constant of the element
Loads on nodes and elements are defined by conditions. To scroll and define the conditions you can use the
buttons (Previous and next condition) on the
bottom bar.
12.3 Tools menu and command bar

– activate movements (right, left, up and down); – activate pan
(dynamic movement). This function is activated automatically when you
– set characters;
– call help;
– set the grid;
12.4 Pop-up menus

The pop-up menu can be activated by right-clicking inside the window
mesh graphics. Voices allow you to quickly activate certain functions.
– Number nodes allows you to view the mesh nodes and number them.
– Number elements allows you to view the elements of the mesh and number them.
– Highlight node / element, allows you to highlight the indicated object.
– Copy loads allows you to copy the selected loads and copy them to another condition.

100
13 Analysis Menu
The menu allows you to access the main ones

windows for defining analysis options. The figure
shows the menu items that
they will be better specified later.
The menu comes in different forms in
function of the structure being analysed.
13.1 Lift options

The window can be accessed from the item of the same name in the Analysis menu. The menu item is active
when performing the foundation structure calculation.
In the window you can set:
– Lift method, it is possible to choose between the methods of: Terzaghi, Meyerhof, Hansen, Vesic and
Cascone;
– Average criterion to determine the characteristics of the equivalent soil. The program
allows you to choose between Arithmetic, Weighted and Meyerhof average .
– Lift reduction, to reduce lift in case of eccentric loading. It is possible to choose
between Meyerhof and Bowles or not to take eccentric loads into account.
– Reduction due to local failure or punching of the ground according to Terzaghi, Vesic.
– Considers the form factors even in the presence of an inclined load allows you to evaluate the
bearing capacity of the foundation soil considering both the shape and inclination factors of the
load. In some reference texts, it is suggested to neglect the form factors of the
foundation in the presence of inclined load.
13.1.1 Calculation options for mixed foundation
In the lower part of the Lift Options window you can define the parameters for the calculation
of the mixed foundation. The NTC 2008 and NTC 2018 regulations introduce the concept of foundation
mixed (foundation whose resistance is delegated to the ground on which the foundation rests and to the
piles/micropiles). The scenarios envisaged by the standards include two possible configurations:
piles/micropiles used as settlement reducers or piles/micropiles contributing to load-bearing. In the first
case the load-bearing capacity must be guaranteed by the foundation alone (no piles) while in the second case the
bearing capacity is the sum of the two contributions (soil and piles).
In the program to make the foundation work as a mixed foundation it is enough to define a constant
of Winkler subgrade (under the foundation) and the piles must be present.
Therefore, the options foreseen for this type of foundation are:
– Mixed foundation calculation, allows you to tell the program whether the mixed foundation should be
considered for vertical loads only (NTC 2018 – Ministerial Decree 17 January 2018) or also for loads
horizontal (Circular no. 7 of 21 January 2019).
– Percent significant interaction, expressed as a percentage, is a data that the program
use only to indicate whether the interaction can be considered significant (i.e. whether the load transmitted
to the ground is greater than the defined percentage).
– Perform checks…, allows you to choose whether the load-bearing capacity is entrusted to the foundation alone
superficial (the piles must be considered as reducing settlement) or if the bearing capacity is
of the mixed foundation (soil and piles).
In the case of insignificant interaction it would be advisable to delegate all the resistance to the poles,
thus setting the surface Winkler constant to zero.
The 2018 NTCs talk about mixed foundations in paragraphs 6.4.3.3 and 7.11.5.3.2.
For the rolling verification it is possible to take passive push participation into account,
percentage of resistance offered by the soil supporting the foundation.
13.2 Plate/lattice analysis options


102
–
Infinitely rigid plate. The stiffness of the plate is automatically determined
by the program based on the characteristics of the material and the thickness of the plate.
Activating this option infinitely amplifies the basic stiffness. This option served for
maintain compatibility of results with the program that gave rise to API++ (SPA);
– Averaged nodal stress values. In the
finite element models the solution is known only in
some points of the element (Gauss points), in all the
other points the solution must be determined by
the shape functions of the element. This procedure
can lead, to the frontier of the elements (of elements
adjacent), at different stress values, obtaining

a solution with discontinuities on the border.
Enabling this option causes the values
obtained on the border are mediated allowing for
obtain a continuous solution (gradual variation
of solicitation);
–
Superstructure stiffness factor. The stiffness of the superstructure comes
determined as D × (1+fR) where fR is the set factor and D is the bending stiffness of the
plate;
–
if there are beams it is possible to activate the torsional stiffness of the beams and if the beams
they are in solidarity with the audience;

–
Considers the weight of the ground weighing on the plate, allowing you to also take into account the weight of the
soil on the foundation (if present) as a surface load
In the case of plate analysis it is possible to set:

–
Analysis in terms of plane stresses.
–
Analysis in terms of plane deformations.
Example:
Square plate with a side of 3.00 m and thickness varying from 0.25 to 1.00 m subjected to stress
normal N = 200000 kg and moment Mx = 50000 kgm.
If infinitely rigid behavior is considered, the plate does not deform whatever it is
the thickness. If, however, the real stiffness of the elements that make up the plate is taken into account, it tends to deform less
and less as the thickness increases until it tends to
infinitely rigid plate behavior.
Infinitely rigid plate

S = 0.25 m S = 0.50 m S = 0.75 m S = 1.00 m
Deformable plate
S = 0.25 m S = 0.50 m S = 0.75 m S = 1.00 m
The strong deformability of elements of modest thickness, if the infinite plate option is active
rigid, has repercussions on the reinforcements which have the task of making the structure infinitely rigid.
Therefore, by activating this option what you obtain is a greater amount of armor.

104
Infinitely rigid plate Plate not infinitely rigid
13.3 Plinth analysis options
It is possible to access the Plinth Analysis Options window from the item of the same name in the Analysis menu. There
menu item is active only when calculating a structure with plinths.

–
if the lift is known, activating the check
Imposed lift can be defined
ultimate bearing capacity of the ground, expressed in [P1];
–
whether to consider the increase in stiffness
below the collar, allows you to increase the
stiffness of the plinth at the
collar by an increase factor;
This increase in stiffness allows for
have a better load distribution
applied on the plinth and reduce peak effects
which could concentrate in correspondence
of the point of application of the load (centre of gravity
of the collar).
–
Extend the glass overall rigidity area, allows you to enlarge the area to a greater extent
stiffness to the area occupied by the glass.
–
Considers soil weight on the plinth, allows you to also take the weight of the soil into account
on the foundation (if present).
–
Considers glass weight geotechnical checks, allows the weight of the glass to be taken into account
glass in geotechnical checks (if present) as surface load.
– Passive resistance contribution calculated on glass height, allows you to add, to
passive resistance offered by the backing soil to the base of the plinth, the resistance contribution
passive of the soil surrounding the glass.
– Loads applied to the head of the glass, allows you to communicate to the program which loads
inserted on the plinth refer to the head of the glass and not to the extrados of the plinth base.
– The contribution of the resistance of the lateral surfaces in the sliding test. This option is active for rectangular plinths and
using the 2018 NTCs.
Example torsional stiffness of beams:
If a moment is applied on the left plinth:
– if we consider the torsional stiffness of the beams, the beam, due to the constraint, will come
solicited by a torque which will, in turn, transfer to the right plinth as a moment;
– if the torsional stiffness of the beams is not considered, the beam does not transfer anything and the two plinths are not
influenced by the moment effects applied to the individual plinths.
In the example, both the effect of the moment, applied on the left plinth, and of the weight were considered
own, therefore in the drawing you can also notice the bending effects due to the own weights alone.
Model response if you ACTIVATE the Model answer if you DO NOT ACTIVATE the
Torsional stiffness Torsional stiffness
Example increase in stiffness below the collar:
If the stiffness increase factor is not activated, the result is: lower stresses distributed over a larger surface, and widespread
reinforcement.

106
If you activate the stiffness increase factor you have: higher stresses distributed over one
less large surface area, and armor localized only in the rigid section.
13.4 Interaction analysis options
The Interaction Analysis Options window can be accessed from the Analysis menu item of the same name.
The menu item is active only when calculating a foundation.
It is possible to set the options:

ÿ
Tensile resistant soil: by activating the check
if the foundation tends to rise from the ground, as a result
of a moment, the springs representing the
connection between soil and foundation continue to
resist, limiting the vertical movements of the foundation;
Model, choice between Winkler model and

ÿ
interaction model. In the Winkler model where
the stiffness between the ground and the foundation is defined
by the User, in the interaction model the stiffness between
land and foundation is calculated by the program in
function of the deformability parameters of the soil, of
stratigraphy, the loads applied, the geometry of the
foundation, the method chosen for settlements and the
options regarding ground stiffness and radius
of influence. If you choose this method the value of

vertical Winkler constant possibly defined not
is taken into account.

–
Horizontal surface Winkler constant. The choice can be made between the options:
Calculated by the program or set. If the choice is set the value used in the model
will be the one defined in the Winkler constants window.

–
the stiffness between the soil and the foundation. The choice can be made between variable and constant for
all combinations. In the first case the stiffness is calculated for each calculation combination
while in the second an average stiffness is calculated which is used for all
combinations;
– the radius of influence of the load of the loads in the evaluation of the stiffness of the
foundation. The choice can be made between a radius defined by the User and the entire foundation;
– for plinth foundations, by activating the use plinth center value option, only one is evaluated
value of the stiffness of the foundation (at the center of the plinth) which is considered representative of the whole
plinth;
– tolerance in the solution

108
13.5 Settlement analysis options

The Interaction Analysis Options window can be accessed from the Analysis menu item of the same name.
The menu item is active only when calculating a foundation.
It is possible to set:
–
the voltage calculation method. The choice can be made between the Boussinesq methods ,
Westergaard and Frolich;
–
the settlement calculation method . The choice can be made between the oedometric method, the
non-linear oedometric method (method that uses the oedometric curve) and the elastic method.
The program also allows you to differentiate the method for each layer.
To define the data associated with these methods, consult the chapter on data description
of the land;
–
the depth for calculating settlements. The choice
can be carried out between automatic and assigned equal to ...
defined by the User. If you choose “automatic”, it is the program
which identifies the depth beyond which an increase of
tensions due to the load is no longer significant and the calculation of
subsidence is done to that depth. If you choose
“assigned to …”, it is the User who defines as far as he wants
calculate the settlement. A choice of this type can be
done when the depth of the rigid layer is known;
–
the maximum subdivision thickness of each layer
(DH),
13.6 Pile analysis options

The Pile Analysis Options window can be accessed from the item of the same name in the Analysis menu. There
menu item is present only when calculating a foundation.
In the window you can set the options for calculating the vertical lift and lift
horizontal and for the calculation of settlements of foundation piles.
As regards the calculation of the vertical lift, it is possible to set:
–
the method for calculating lift. It is possible to choose between the Terzaghi methods,
Meyerhof, Hansen, Vesic, Berezantzev and reduced Berezantzev, Bustamante-Doix;
– the trend of vertical pressure.
By clicking on the Set pressure button

vertical you access the trend window
of the vertical pressure from which it is
You can choose one of the three methods provided
disposition;
– activating the Corner correction check
of friction depending on the type of pole (fixed
/ drilled), we communicate to the program of
correct the friction angle according to the
construction type of the pole;

–
the calculation of the lift by applying the coefficients
for the actions on the own weight of the
pole and on negative friction
As regards the calculation of the horizontal lift, it is possible to set:
Winkler constant. In this section the trend of the Winkler constant is chosen
horizontal of the terrain with depth. This choice can be made between the following categories:
Layer, by selecting this item you tell the program to use the value of the
ÿ
Winkler constant defined in the soil stratigraphy.

110
Constant, selecting this item tells the program to use the value of
ÿ
Winkler constant constant with depth (the field to enter the value is activated
desired).
Binomial, selecting this item tells the program to use the value of
ÿ
Winkler constant variable with depth according to the law expressed by the relation:
n
kh = A + B × z
in which the depth z is expressed in [L1], the coeff. A represents the value of the constant for z =
0 (head of the pole), while the value of n depends on the type of law one intends to assume. To
example, if you want to assume a law of linear variation you set n = 1, while if you want
to set a square root variation law is to set the value n = 0.5. If you wanted
set a law of linear variation such that it has a value of 1 in correspondence with
surface and a value of 5 at a depth of 10 meters the following values should be set: A = 1; B
= 0.4; n = 1.
Failure criterion of the pile-soil system, for the analysis of the pile subjected to horizontal forces. THE
failure criteria can also be more than one. API performs a nonlinear analysis of the system
ground-pole. The springs that pattern the ground are not considered infinitely elastic
but with elastoplastic behavior: they react up to a certain limit beyond which
they offer no further increases in resistance. The possible settings are:
Limit shift, the soil is considered reagent until one is reached

ÿ
limit shift that the User can set in the appropriate input field. Such a shift
limit must be expressed in [L2];
Limit pressure, the medium is considered reagent until a is reached

ÿ
determined limit pressure; once this limit value has been exceeded, the land does not offer a further increase in value
resistence. Using the [Define>>] button you access the Limit pressure definition window
which allows you to define the trend of the limit pressure. In API you can differentiate the
method of calculating the limit pressure for each individual layer by activating the item <Different for each
layer>.
Infinitely elastic pole, in the analysis of the pole subjected to horizontal forces the program puts in
I take into account both the breaking of the ground and the plasticization of the pole. By activating this
option you can tell the program to consider the pole infinitely elastic.
the calculation of the transverse lift by applying the coefficients ÿÿ and ÿ4 on the soil parameters.
ÿ
As regards the calculation of settlements, it is possible to set the limit displacements due to friction
lateral and at the tip which respectively mobilize lateral lift and lift at the tip of the pile,
expressed in [L2]. This data is necessary for the calculation of the vertical load-settlement curve
of the pole.
The distribution check on piles with moment allows the transfer of moment stresses
from the foundation to the top of the piles. The option should be used in particular for foundations
single pile or with aligned piles. If you choose <Automatic> and there are aligned poles at the same time
and not, the option will be applied only to aligned poles.
Material safety coefficient
In this section the safety coefficients on the pole materials are defined
NOTE:
If you wanted to consider the soil with infinitely elastic behavior, you would have to
turn off both the limit shift option and the limit pressure option.
13.6.1 Definition of vertical pressure trend
It is possible to access the Vertical pressure trend window by clicking on the [Set] button
vertical pressure] of the Pile Analysis Options window.
The data that can be set in the window concern the calculation of lateral lift and
tip.
Vertical pressure can be defined as:

112
–
Geostatic pressure. Vertical pressure increases with depth according to the law
linear ÿv = ÿ ·z where ÿ is the weight per unit volume of the soil and Z is the depth with respect to the surface
countryside;
–
Geostatic pressure up to
m… and then constant. The pressure
vertical grows with depth
according to the law ÿv = ÿ·z up to
depth defined by the User
in the appropriate input field. For
deeper depths the pressure

vertical remains constant.
–
Geostatic pressure up to Z = Zc and then constant. The vertical pressure increases with the
depth according to the law ÿv = ÿ·z up to depth Z = Zc. For greater depths the
vertical pressure remains constant and equal to ÿc. By setting this option the program
automatically calculates the critical depth Zc for each pile;

Furthermore, it is possible to set whether the calculated vertical pressure should be used
also in the calculation of lateral lift. The check is also used to calculate lateral lift
if it is activated, the set geostatic pressure trend is also considered valid for the
calculation of the lateral bearing capacity of the pile, otherwise for the calculation of the lateral bearing capacity it comes
assumed a trend for the vertical pressure, with the trend of the geostatic pressure.
NOTE:
In fact, some authors maintain that the vertical pressure does not grow indefinitely, but is reached
a certain depth Zc it remains constant. The Zc value depends on the friction angle of the
soil, the diameter and length of the pole.
Peak lift: Peak lift: Peak lift:

Geostatic pressure Pressure with defined Zc Pressure with defined Zc

Lateral lift: Lateral lift: Lateral lift:
Geostatic pressure Geostatic pressure Pressure with defined Zc
13.6.2 Definition of limit pressure
It is possible to access the Limit pressure definition window by clicking on the [Set >>] button
next to the pile-soil failure criterion at limit pressure of the Pile Analysis Options window.
The data that can be set in the window concern the variability of the limit pressure along the
pole stem.
It is possible to set, for the horizontal limit pressure, one of the following options:
– Constant limit pressure
admits that the limiting resistance has
a constant trend with the
depth and you can set the
value in the relevant input field. The
value is expressed in [P1]. This
it could be the case of a pole

immersed in cohesive soil in
undrained conditions Plimit = 9 · cu.
– Variable limit pressure: the limit resistance is admitted to have a trend
variable with depth according to the law Plimit = A + B · zn . Activating this option is
It is possible to set the coefficients A, B and n for the definition of the variability law. The depth
z with respect to the ground level is expressed in [L1] while the limit pressure is expressed in [P1].
– Brinch-Hansen: when this option is activated the program considers it as pressure
limit that proposed by Brinch-Hansen Plimit = q Kpq + c Kpc In this expression q represents the vertical pressure at the
generic depth Z and c the cohesion. The factors Kpq and Kpc depend
by the ground friction angle and the Z/D ratio (D diameter of the pile).
– Passive pressure: when you activate this option the program considers it as
limit pressure the passive pressure multiplied by a given Multiplier. For example
In the case of inconsistent soils, Broms assumes a limit pressure trend equal to
passive pressure with a multiplier of 3.
– Constant in the layer, hypothesizes the trend of the constant limit resistance in the layer. The value
required is the undrained cohesion multiplier. This could be the case with a pole
immersed in multiple soils of a cohesive nature in undrained conditions

114
13.7 Earthquake Options
The Earthquake Options window can be accessed from the item of the same name in the Analysis menu. The data are
function of the chosen regulation.
If it is set as a calculation regulation, the Ministerial Decree 1988 + Ministerial Decree 1996 must be defined:
–
the seismic intensity coefficient, expressed in percent (%), depending on the category
seismicity of the area;

–
the coefficient of importance ÿI. It depends on the intended use of the structure
It is possible to insert an amplification coefficient for the seismic action. The value varies between 1.0 and 1.4.
If you set it as NTC 2008 or NTC 2018, the following can be defined
sizes:
–
ground acceleration (ag),
expressed in [m/s2 ]. Automatically the
program evaluates the value of ag/g;

– The maximum factor Of
horizontal spectrum amplification (F0);

–
the beginning period of the spectrum section a
constant speed (T*c);

–
the type of subsoil and therefore the
stratigraphic coefficient (SS). There
legislation provides for a further increase

seismic as a function of the soil
foundation. Five (plus two) are expected
subsoil categories identified by
letters A..E. Depending on the type of

underground
the seismic action is increased by a certain coefficient. The program reports the aforementioned coefficient according to the
type of subsoil selected. The proposed value cannot
be modified by the User as it is the rule that tells us how it must be evaluated;
–
the Topographic Amplification Coefficient (ST). It is an amplifying coefficient for works
important erected near slopes with an inclination greater than 15° and a difference in height greater than 30
meters.
The values of ag, F0 and T*C must be defined both for the ultimate limit state (ULS) analysis and at the
exercise (SLE).
The program automatically evaluates the coeff. of horizontal seismic intensity both at ULS and SLE
as a product of:
kh = ag/ g × SS × ST
NOTE:
The Technical Construction Regulations provide for four limit states, two of which are ultimate limit states
(collapse limit state (SLC) and life-saving limit state (SLV)), the other two were
serviceability limit (damage limit state (SLD) and serviceability limit state (SLO)).
Depending on the limit states used in the calculation of the superstructure we can define the values of ag,
F0 and T*C relating to the limit state considered.
Example:
Let's assume we are planning the foundation of a structure in the city of Cosenza.
Type of construction: Ordinary works, infrastructure works of normal importance;
Rated life: 50 years;
Class of use: 2nd class – Normal crowding, non-hazardous industries;
TR adj F0 T*C
[years] [m/s2 ] [s]
SLO 30 0.692 2,290 0.281
SLD 50 0.918 2,278 0.302
SLV 475 2,655 2,432 0.372
SLC 975 3,552 2,464 0.410
13.7.1 Seismic coefficients DM 88 + DM 96
The 1988/1996 seismic legislation divides the national territory into four operational zones
of the ground acceleration predicted by the design earthquake. Each zone is characterized by the degree of
seismicity S.
The seismic intensity coefficient C (which represents the rate of acceleration due to gravity) is related
to the degree of seismicity from the relationship:
C = ( S - 2 ) / 100
Category Seismicity degree S Seismic intensity coefficient C
THE 12 10%
II 9 7%
III 6 4%
IV 0 0%
Only the C coefficient is involved in the calculations.

116
14 Armor Menu
The Armature menu allows you to call up windows that allow you to set specifications for
the design of the reinforcement of the elements of the analyzed structure.. .
14.1 Plate reinforcement options

The Plate Reinforcement Options window can be called from the menu item of the same name
Armours. In this window you can set specifications for rebar design
of the plate. The window is divided into four sections: Reinforcement parameters, Reinforcement specifications
Lowers, Upper Armor Specifics and Cutting/Punching.
In the Reinforcement Parameters section in particular it is possible to set:

–
Reinforcement direction (inclination of the reinforcements with respect to the horizontal direction), expressed
in [°];
– Concrete cover, expressed in [L2];

–
Lower and upper rod diameter in X and Y direction, expressed in [L3];
– Anchorage length, expressed in diameters;
– Maximum length of bars, expressed in [L1];
– % Minimum tension reinforcement compared to the concrete area;
– % Compressed reinforcement compared to the concrete area;

–
Minimum number of lower bars in the X and Y direction (per linear metre);
–
No. of upper bars minimum in X and Y direction (per linear metre);
In the Lower Reinforcement Specifications and Upper Reinforcement Specifications sections you can set the
geometric characteristics of reinforcing bars:
– end of section options of the designed irons. The options made available are:
– always extend the needles to the edge;
– extend the bars up to the edge if they end at a distance less than m…;
– iron extension to the upper or lower edge with a 45° shaped section);
– options on vertical brackets. The options made available are:
– vertical end section equal to the thickness of the bed;
– vertical end section equal to cm….
– options on horizontal squares: horizontal square stretch equal to cm …;
– build a shape if there are interruptions smaller than …;
– homogenizes needle shapes for length differences less than m….
In the Cutting/Punching section it is possible to define:
– the type of verification chosen between cutting and punching;
– for the Cut it is possible to define:
or the shaped diameter, expressed in [L3];
or the cotg q, which can be defined or calculated automatically by the software to optimize the shear-
compression and shear-traction resistance values.
–
for Punching it is possible to define:
or the type of armor chosen between vertical stitching and bent bars;
o for bent bars it is possible to choose the shaping angle, between 30°, 45° and 60°;
o the minimum number of perimeter seams, if punching reinforcement is needed;
or the diameter, expressed in [L3];

118
or the distance of the first set of seams from the pillar, expressed as a percentage of the height
useful;
or the maximum radial distance between two sets of stitching, expressed as a percentage of the height
useful;
or the maximum distance of the seam arms around the first perimeter, expressed as
percentage of useful height;
or the maximum distance of the arms of the seams around the i-th perimeter, expressed as
percentage of useful height;
or the distance of the last set of reinforcements from the verification perimeter along which shear reinforcement is no longer
necessary, expressed as a percentage of the useful height.
o Directional reinforcement arrangement…, allows you to choose the positioning scheme of the punching bars. The choice can
be made between: according to the X and Y axes, Radial and circumference and standard. The three provisions
correspond to the diagrams below:
According to the X and Y axes
According to the radial direction and along the

circumference
Standard: X and Y direction and along the diagonals that

connect the center of gravity of the pillar/
plinth/load with the vertex of the perimeter of the
object itself.
14.2 Plinth reinforcement options
The options for the design of the plinth reinforcements can be defined for each individual type.
The window shows the list of all the defined plinth types.
By clicking on the <Reinforcement specifications> button you access the window described in the chapter
relating to the plinth type definition.
14.3 Beam reinforcement options
The options for the design of the plinth reinforcements can be defined for each individual type.
The window shows the list of all the defined plinth types.
By clicking on the <Reinforcement specifications> button you access the window described in the chapter
relating to the beam type definition.

120
14.4 Specific pile reinforcements
In this window it is possible to set the specifications for the design/verification of the pile reinforcements.
– Use the same diameter for all posts, it allows you to

standardize the diameter of the reinforcing bars used in
design of the foundation piles, at the largest diameter
obtained from the design of the individual piles;
– arrange armor according to the Technical Regulations (ch. 7.2.5),
allows you to differentiate the pile reinforcement into two zones.
An armor percentage of 1% is used for the
area that undergoes plasticization and for a stretch beyond the
plasticized area equal to 10 pole diameters and one
percentage equal to 0.30% for the remaining area. There
percentage refers to the concrete section.
– the cotg ÿ, which can be defined by the User or calculated
automatically by the software to optimize the values
resistant to shear-compression and shear-traction.
14.5 Glass armor options
The Glass Armature Options window can be called from the Armature menu item of the same name.
In this window you can set specifications for the armor design
glasses.
In particular it is possible to set:
ÿ concrete cover, expressed in [L2];
ÿ diameter of the vertical bars, expressed as [L3];
ÿ anchoring length (represents the
length beyond which the iron can be
considered reagent),, expressed in

diameters;
ÿ maximum air gap, expressed in diameters;
ÿ bracket diameter (horizontal bars), expressed
in [L3];
ÿ maximum bracket pitch, expressed in [L2].
The verification of the glasses is carried out with the CNR 10025/84 regulation. This legislation provides
as resistant armor the vertical armor arranged in the corner pillars of the glass and the
horizontal brackets arranged above and below. The maximum air gap definable in this
window is used by the program to provide a minimum technological armor as well
on the walls of the glass which are irrelevant in structural checks.
14.6 ULS verification options

This window is called up from the Armature menu item of the same name, and allows you to set the
following parameters:
• Safety coefficient of concrete, represents the coefficient for which it will be
divided the cubic characteristic strength of the concrete to give the strength of
calculation;
• Steel safety coefficient, represents the coefficient by which it will be divided
the yield stress of the steel to provide the calculation strength;
• Reduction factor Rbk for long-term loads;
• Reduction factor Rbk – Rck from cubic to cylindrical resistance;
• Section safety coefficient, degree of section overstrength

verify.
In the <Domain Construction> section , you can choose how to determine the status of
failure stress of the section (ultimate stresses):
• constant N/M ratio, allows you to determine the ultimate stress by increasing the
N/M ratio in a constant way (in this case the ultimate moment is different in each section
verification),
• Constant normal stress, allows you to determine the ultimate moment by keeping it constant
the normal calculation effort determined in the section.

122
14.7 SLE verification options

In this window it is possible to set the specifications for the checks in the current combinations
exercise limit (SLE).
In particular, the program carries out cracking verification and voltage peak verification
The table shows common data and specific data for the two checks.
The common data concerns:

ÿ the environmental conditions, from the selector you can set the value of the environment used by the
program to carry out operational limit state checks. You can choose between environment
little aggressive (or ordinary), moderately aggressive (or aggressive) environment and environment
very aggressive.
Cracking checks also include:

ÿ the Sensitivity of the armor to be chosen between Sensitive or Not very sensitive. Sensitive Armor.
Hardened, untempered steels of any diameter and size belong to this group
cold work-hardened steels subject to permanent tensions - greater than 390 N/mm2. Little armor
sensitive. Other armor and adequately protected armor belong to this group.
ÿ Crack opening limit values used in cracking checks in the various limit states,
expressed in units of measurement [L3]. Furthermore, you can indicate whether to adopt a limit for the verification as well
with the rare SLE combination (limit not foreseen by the 2008/2018 NTC);
ÿ The crack opening calculation method chosen from: Ministerial Circular 252 (15/1096),
EC2. and NTC2018-Circular 7
ÿ The type of armor chosen between improved and non-improved adhesion armour;
– Calculation of cracking moment. You can choose between Crack formation and Crack opening
cracks. The first option involves a reduction in the second normal tensile stress
le NTC [4.1.13]: ÿt=fctm/1.2
– Tensile strength for… It is possible to choose whether to use fctm or fcfm.
The voltage checks also include:
ÿ the maximum stress in concrete and steel as a function of load combinations
of exercise.
14.8 Arrange armor
Through this item it is possible to arrange the weaves based on the minimum number of irons set
in the relevant armor options windows.
14.9 Reinforcement design / verification
Through these commands the design and/or verification phase of the reinforcements is started if already available
present.

124
15 Results Menu
The Results menu allows you to recall the windows of the results obtained from the analysis.
15.1 Global Results
It is possible to access the Analysis Results window by calling it from the menu item of the same name
Results and is opened automatically by the program at the end of the analysis.
The window is divided into two sections, Vertical Load Analysis and Horizontal Load Analysis.
The following results are reported in the Vertical Load Analysis section:
ÿ total vertical load, expressed in [F1];
ÿ constraint reactions (if there are point or line constraints), expressed in [F1];
ÿ resulting piles (if there are piles), expressed in [F1];
ÿ soil reaction, expressed in [F1];
ÿ maximum and minimum displacements, expressed in [L2] and positions where these results were obtained,
expressed in [L2];
ÿ maximum and minimum moment stresses with vector axis in the X and Y direction, expressed in [F1
× L1] and positions where these results were obtained, expressed in [L2].
By clicking on the [Details >>] button you can access the Overall Results window in which
synthetic results are reported on the maximum and minimum stresses with the indicated
combination that generated that result.
In the Horizontal Load Analysis section the following results are reported in the X and Y directions:
ÿ total load, expressed in [F1];
ÿ constraint reactions, expressed in [F1];

ÿ resulting soil and pile reaction, expressed in [F1];
ÿ maximum and minimum displacement, expressed in [L2];
ÿ maximum and minimum voltages, expressed in [P1];
If foundation piles are present, the maximum cut e is also reported in the calculation model
minimum agent on the poles, with the poles subject to such actions indicated.
Example:
Layer n° 1: Layer thickness H = 3.00 m
Volume weight ÿ = 1800 kg/m3
Friction angle ÿ = 30°
Foundation-soil friction angle ÿ = 20°
Cohesion c = 0.00 kg/cm2

Membership ca = 0.00 kg/cm2
State n° 2: Layer thickness H = 12 m
Volume weight ÿ = 1620 kg/m3
Friction angle ÿ = 26°

Equivalent layer: Height of the failure wedge H = 6.63 m
Volume weight ÿ = 1701.42 kg/m3
Friction angle ÿ = 27.81°

Soil-foundation friction angle (ÿ) and soil-foundation adhesion (ca) are relative to the soil
on the installation surface.

126
15.1.1 Overall results
It is possible to access the Overall Results window by calling it from the [Details] button
from the Analysis Results window.
The window shows:
ÿ the maximum and minimum displacement, expressed in [L2];

ÿ moment stress
maximum and minimum in
X and Y direction, expressed in

[F1 × L1];
ÿ the position where you are

obtained these values, expressed in
[L2];
ÿ the index of the combination that determined the value is also shown in brackets
maximum and minimum (displacements and moments).
15.2 Plate results
The window is divided into four panels Loads, Lift, Scroll and Displacements.
In the Loads panel it is reported for the three

directions X, Y and Z:
• the total load acting on the plate,

expressed in [L1];
• the eccentricity of the load in direction
X and Y, expressed in [L1];

• the resultant of the loads transferred to
ground, expressed in [F1];

constraints, expressed in [F1];

poles, expressed in [F1];
• the percentage of discharge on

ground.
In the Lift panel it is reported:

• the bearing capacity of the ground
foundation, expressed in [F1] e
[P1];
• the design load-bearing capacity of the
foundation, expressed in [F1];

• the vertical load transferred to the
soil, expressed in [F1];

• the coeff. safety at limit load,
ratio between Qd and N;

• the coeff. of bearing capacity (N) e
those corrected (N') by the other factors
(shape, depth, eccentricity,
etc.);
• maximum, average and minimum pressure transferred from the foundation to the ground, expressed in
[P1];
• geostatic pressure at the laying surface, expressed in [P1];

• the characteristics of the equivalent layer:
o H, height of the failure wedge under the foundation, expressed in [L1];
og, volume weight, expressed in [F1/L1^3];
of, friction angle, expressed in [°];
oc, cohesion, expressed in [P1]
The Scrolling panel displays:

• the resulting total horizontal load
of the loads in the X and Y direction,
expressed in [F1];
• the frictional resistance of the soil
expressed in [F1];
• the contribution of the passive thrust
expressed in [F1];
• the resistance of the piles if necessary
present expressed in [F1];

• the coeff. sliding safety.
Ratio between the design lift

and the total horizontal load. If the

128
ratio is greater than 1.0 the check

she is satisfied.
The Movements panel displays:
• the maximum distortion between the points in
where the pillars are present;
• the minimum and maximum displacement,

expressed in [L2];
• the differential displacement

maximum, expressed in [L2].
15.3 Plinth results
It is possible to access the Plinth Results window by calling it from the menu item of the same name
Results.
The window is divided into two sections, Distribution Loads and Applied Loads. In both
sections a table is shown in which the resulting loads are listed respectively
from the distribution (loads on the lower base of the "intrados" plinth) and the applied loads (loads on the
upper base of the “extrados” plinth).
Both tables report:
ÿ Plinth identifier (No.);
ÿ normal applied and distribution stress, expressed in [F1];
ÿ shear in the X (Tx) and Y (Ty) directions, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Moment with vector axis X (Mx) and Y (My), expressed in [F1 × L1].
Using the [ÿ] and [ÿ] buttons, shown in the lower part of the window, it is possible to scroll the
results on the plinths of all the combinations analyzed.
By clicking on the [Details] button you can access the Plinth Details window in which
additional information on the results of the plinths is reported.
Example
For an isolated plinth on which a shear moment and a normal stress act in the loads
divided you will have:

• the vertical component as the sum of the normal stress and the weight of the plinth;
• the shear component will be equal to the applied load; the moment
• component will be the sum of the applied moment and the product of the shear
leading agent multiplied by the height of the plinth.

130
15.4 Geotechnical results of the plinths
The window is divided into three panels Lifting, Sliding and Tipping.
In the Lift panel it is reported:
• Ip, plinth index;

• Nt, vertical load transferred to the ground, expressed in [F1];
• Np, vertical load transferred to the piles, expressed in [F1];
• Qu, ultimate bearing capacity of the foundation soil, expressed in [F1];
• Qup, ultimate bearing capacity of any piles present, expressed in [F1];
• Qd, design lift expressed in [F1]. Ultimate lift divided by the safety factor
expected for the type of combination being analyzed;
• FS, safety factor at limit load. Ratio between Qd and N;

• FSmin, minimum safety factor calculated between all the combinations analyzed and the
combination in which it occurred;
• rt, percentage of vertical loads discharge onto the ground. This value is less than 1 in the case of
mixed foundation, equal to 1 if the plinth is superficial, equal to zero in the case of a plinth on piles and
not mixed foundation.
The Scrolling panel displays:
• Tt, horizontal load transferred to the ground, expressed in [F1];
• Tp, horizontal load transferred to the piles, expressed in [F1]; •
Ru, ultimate resistance to sliding of the foundation soil, expressed in [F1]; • Rup, ultimate
resistance for horizontal loads of any piles present, expressed in

[F1];
• Rd, design resistance to sliding, expressed in [F1]. Ultimate resistance divided by the
safety factor expected for the type of combination being analysed;
• FS, sliding safety factor. Relationship between Rd and T;

combination in which it occurred
• rt, percentage of horizontal loads discharged onto the ground.

•
The Tipping panel shows:

• Mr, overturning moment, expressed in [F1 L1];
• Ms, stabilizing moment, expressed in [F1 L1];
• FS, safety factor against overturning. Relationship between Ms and Mr;
combination in which it occurred.
The characteristics of the equivalent layer are shown in the lower part of the window:
• H, height of the failure wedge under the foundation, expressed in [L1];
• g, volume weight, expressed in [F1/L1^3];
• f, friction angle, expressed in [°];
• c, cohesion, expressed in [P1]
The minimum and maximum pressure transferred from the foundation to the ground, expressed in [P1].
15.5 Beam results
It is possible to access the Beam Results window by calling it from the menu item of the same name
Results and is opened automatically by the program at the end of the analysis when you
a foundation with beams is analyzed.
The window is divided into three panels Loads, Lift and Grid Results.
In the Loads panel it is reported for the three directions X, Y and Z:
ÿ the results of the acting loads, expressed in [F1];
ÿ the results of the loads transferred to the ground, expressed in [F1];
ÿ the results of the loads transferred to the constraints, expressed in [F1];

132
ÿ the results of the loads transferred to the piles, expressed in [F1];
ÿ the percentages of discharge onto the ground.
In the Load-bearing panel the following is reported for each beam:
ÿ It, beam index;
ÿ Nt, vertical load transferred to the ground, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Np, vertical load transferred to any piles present, expressed in [F1];
ÿ pu, ultimate bearing capacity of the ground, expressed in [P1];
ÿ Qu, ultimate bearing capacity of the foundation soil, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Qup, ultimate bearing capacity of any piles present, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Qd, design lift, expressed in [F1]. Ultimate lift divided by the safety factor
ÿ FS, safety factor at limit load. Ratio between Qd and N;

ÿ FSmin, minimum safety factor calculated between all the combinations analyzed and the
combination in which it occurred.
The Trellis Results panel reports:
ÿ It, index of trellis beams;
ÿ T, horizontal load transferred to the ground, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Ru, ultimate resistance to sliding of the foundation soil, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Rup, ultimate bearing capacity for horizontal loads of any piles present, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Rd, design lift, expressed in [F1]. Ultimate strength divided by the safety factor
ÿ FS, safety factor at limit load. Relationship between Rd and T.
Using the [<< Combination] and [Combination >>] buttons, shown at the bottom of the
window, you can scroll through the results of all analyzed combinations.
15.6 Post results
15.6.1 Geotechnical checks
It is possible to access the Results window for geotechnical pile checks via the item of the same name
of the menu.
The table for each pole shows:

ÿ Object, Foundation object that contains the pile;
ÿ N, normal stress transferred from the foundation to the pile head, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Pd, design vertical lift, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Fsv, safety factor at vertical loads, Pd/N ratio;
ÿ Fsvmin, safety factor at vertical loads minimum among all the combinations analyzed. Between
brackets shows the index of the combination that determined it;
ÿ T, horizontal load transferred from the foundation to the pile head, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Td, design transverse lift, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Fso, safety factor at horizontal loads, Td/N ratio;
ÿ Fsomin, safety factor at horizontal loads minimum among all the combinations analyzed. Between
brackets shows the index of the combination that determined it.
The columns containing the safety factors show one of the values in bold. This indicates
the pole with the worst checks.
The red color indicates the unmet verification while the black color indicates the satisfied verification.
The panel at the bottom of the window contains some information relating to the efficiency of the
palisade. In particular: the sum of the lateral lift, the group lateral lift and
the efficiency of the piling. These lift values are obtained with the characteristic parameters of the
ground.

134
The group lateral bearing capacity is evaluated on a pole whose perimeter is evaluated on the plus perimeter
outside of the piling.
15.6.2 Results details
The window is divided into three panels Overhead Reliefs, Bearing and Settlements and Reinforcement.
The overhead reliefs panel shows the overhead reliefs for each pile:
ÿ N, normal stress (positive if compressive), expressed in [F1];
ÿ Mx, moment with vector axis the X axis, expressed in [F1 L1];
ÿ My, moment with vector axis the Y axis, expressed in [F1 L1];
ÿ Tx, cut with vector axis the X axis, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Ty, cut with vector axis the Y axis, expressed in [F1];
ÿ M, resulting moment, expressed in [F1]; ÿ T,
resulting cut, expressed in [F1].
In the Load-bearing panel the following is reported for each pole:
ÿ Ppmin, characteristic peak lift obtained with the minimum parameters, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Plmin, characteristic lateral lift obtained with the minimum parameters, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Ppmed, characteristic peak lift obtained with the average parameters, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Plmed, characteristic lateral lift obtained with the average parameters, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Aneg, negative friction, expressed in [F1];
ÿ Wp, weight of the pile, expressed in [F1].
In the Settlements and Reinforcement panel the following is reported for each pile:
ÿ w, vertical settlement, expressed in [L2];
ÿ u, horizontal displacement, expressed in [L2];
ÿ nf - df, number and diameter of first section bars, expressed in [L3]; ÿ z,
extension of the first section (initial and final height), expressed in [L1];
ÿ nf - df, number and diameter of rods second section, expressed in [L3];
ÿ z, extension of the second section (initial and final height), expressed in [L1].
For micropiles the last four columns contain no information.

136
15.7 Glass results
The window is divided into four panels Walls transverse to the stress plane, Walls
parallel to the stress plane, Horizontal Reinforcement and Vertical Reinforcement.
In the Walls transversal to the stress plane panel it is reported:

ÿ Object, foundation element that contains the glass;
ÿ Ic, index of the collar on which the glass is inserted (only for plinths);
ÿ F'Sdns F'Rdns, stress and resistance in the upper n direction, expressed in [F1];
ÿ F'Sdts F'Rdts, stress and resistance in the upper t direction, expressed in [F1];
ÿ F'Sdni F'Rdni, stress and resistance in the lower n direction, expressed in [F1];
ÿ F'Sdti, F'Rdti stress and resistance lower t direction, expressed in [F1];
In the Walls parallel to the stress plane panel it is reported:

ÿ NsSdn NsRdn, stress/resistance n direction of the tie, expressed in [F1];
ÿ NsSdt NsRdt, stress/resistance direction t tie, expressed in [F1];
ÿ NcSdn NcRdn, stress/resistance n strut direction, expressed in [F1];
ÿ NcSdt NcRdt, stress/resistance t strut direction, expressed in [F1];
The Horizontal Armor panel displays:

ÿ A, overall section area of the brackets, expressed in [L2^2];
ÿ d, bracket diameter, expressed in [L3];
ÿ ninf and nsup, number of lower and upper stirrups.
The Vertical Reinforcement panel displays:

ÿ Ic, index of the collar on which the glass is inserted (only for plinths); ÿ d,
diameter of the vertical bars, expressed in [L3];
ÿ nfn, number of rods in direction n;
ÿ nft, number of rods in t direction;
ÿ nfpn, number of wall bars in direction n;
ÿ nfpt, number of wall bars in t direction;
ÿ nf, total number of irons.
results of all analyzed combinations.

138
15.8 Movement results
It is possible to access the Movement Results window by calling it from the entry of the same name
Results menu and is automatically opened by the program at the end of the analysis.
The window contains a table containing the following information:

– structure node identifier (node number);
– abscissa (X) and ordinate (Y) of the node, expressed in
[L2]; – vertical displacement (w) of the node, expressed in [L2];
– rotation around the x (fx) and y (fy) axis, expressed in [°];
– displacement in x (ux) and y (uy) directions, expressed in [L2];
– pressure transmitted to the foundation soil (p), expressed in [P1].
results of all analyzed combinations.
15.9 Constraint reactions
The window contains a table which shows the support reactions for each constrained node:
• Rz reaction to vertical translation, expressed in [F1];
• Rmx reaction to rotation around the X axis, expressed in [F1 L1];
• Rmy reaction to rotation around the Y axis, expressed in [F1 L1];
• Rz reaction to translation in the X direction, expressed in [F1];
• Rz reaction to translation in the Y direction, expressed in [F1].
15.10 Cracking results
The window contains two tables: one summary and the other detailed.
The first table contains the summary results and reports:
• Object, foundation element;
• pos, position of the section in which the largest crack was measured;
• Eps, average unit strain, expressed as a percentage;
• sm, distance between cracks, expressed in [L3];
• wm, crack width, expressed in [L3];
• wlim, limit width of the crack, expressed in [L3]. This value is indicated by
regulations and is set in the SLE verification options window.
The second table contains contains:
• pos, position of the section;
• As, reinforcement area within the effective area, expressed in [L2^2];
• Ac, area of the tensioned irons, expressed in [L2^2];
• Mpf, moment of first cracking, expressed in [F1 L1];

140
• Npf, normal first cracking stress, expressed in [F1];
• Eps, average unit strain, expressed as a percentage;
• sm, distance between cracks, expressed in [L3];
• wm, crack width, expressed in [L3].

15.11 Punching results

NTC 2008 – NTC 2018
The punching check is carried out according to the indications contained in the standard
Eurocode 2
Design of Concrete Structures – Part 1-1
The window is divided into two areas: a table containing the checks performed and a panel
which contains details on the checks.
The table shows:
• OP, the object that is punched;
• P, the object that punches;
• VEd,i, shear stress on the perimeter of the punching object, expressed in [P1];
• VRd,max, design value of the maximum shear-punching resistance, expressed in
[P1];
• VEd,f, shear stress on the verification perimeter u1, expressed in [P1];
• VRd,cf, design value of shear-punching resistance without reinforcement on
verification perimeter u1, expressed in [P1];
• VRd,cs, design value of shear-punching resistance with reinforcement, expressed in
[P1];
• FS, Safety factor (lower of the ratios VRd,max/VEd,i, VRd,cf/VEd,fe
VRd,cs/VEd,f).
The details panel shows:

• c1 and c2, dimensions of the load point, expressed in [L3];
• d, useful height of the section, expressed in [L3];
• u0, perimeter of the punching object, expressed in [L3];
• u1, perimeter of the diffuse punching object, expressed in [L3]; • rhoy
and rhoz, percentages of armor in the two directions that extend beyond the zone
widespread, expressed in [%];

142
• dpc and duc, distance of the first and last seam from the face of the pillar, expressed in
[L3];
• nsc, stitching serial number;
• nc, number of stitches for each series.
DM 96
The table shows:

• OP, the object that is punched;
• P, the object that punches;
• N, acting force, expressed in [F1];
• R, resistant force, expressed in [P1];
• hf, thickness, expressed in [L2];
• u, contour perimeter, expressed in [L2];
• FS, Safety Factor.
16 Results graphics
The output of the results (stresses, settlements, reinforcement, engagement of materials, etc.) occurs in a
dedicated graphics window, displayed from the View item in the Graphics menu or from the button
present on the command bar.
The results graphics window consists of a central part (with a white background) where they come
reported the different results and by three bars arranged on the perimeter of the window (on the right, at the bottom and in
high) that allow you to manage the results views and the drawing.
One of the most interesting features of API is certainly the management of the graphical environment. Yes
it is a streamlined, fast and powerful tool that allows the designer to "see" all the
choices made and quickly “navigate” among the analysis results.
16.1 Object selection
API allows an overall and detailed view of the entire foundation.
The bar above allows you to activate/deactivate the view of individual objects using the buttons
described below:
Select object. By lowering the button it is possible to select the object

via mouse. By lifting the button you return to the overall view.
They allow you to scroll through objects of the same family as the active one
16.2 Menu and command bar Views

Foundation geometry. Activates the overall view of the foundation plan
appropriately dimensioned with any elements present: poles, pillars, beams, etc..
Stratigraphy. Activates the display of the defined stratigraphy (probing points, columns
stratigraphic and sections in the X and Y direction).
Poles. Activates the display of the results on the piles (stresses, exercise and limit diagrams, load-settlement
and reinforcement diagrams).
Sagging and tension. Activates the display of results on settlements and tensions
(Horizontal and vertical tension bulb, tensions along a vertical direction and
horizontal and sagging).

144
Nodal shifts. Activates the display of the movements of the audience (displacements
vertical and horizontal in both directions).
Bending, membrane and shear stresses. Activates the display of stresses
bending (moments in the X and Y directions).
Armor list. Activate the display of the reinforcements of the audience or the plinths and yes
prepares for management (insertion of new shapes, modification, etc.).
Check diagrams. Activates the display of the material commitment diagram
constituting the base/plinths analysed.
Required armor area. Activates the display of diagrams relating to the reinforcement area
request.
Beam stresses. Activates the display of moment diagrams on the beams.
Beam reinforcements. Activates the display of beam reinforcements and diagrams
commitment of materials and prepares for management (insertion of new shapes,
modification, etc.).
– set characters;
– view the layout drawings;
– export the current drawing in DXF, WMF, BMP and JPG format
– insert multiple captions
Using the buttons above it is possible to scroll through the analyzed combinations.
16.4 Pop-up menu

Right-clicking on the window displays a pop-up menu that allows
to quickly access some functions for managing drawings and objects.

The items it contains are:
1. Copy image, allows you to copy the active drawing into any other document;
2. Captions, displays the Caption List window;
3. Layout drawing, inserts the active drawing into the graphic layout machine;
4. Display filter, display of maps relating to movements and activities

stresses via filter on max and min values
5. Legend, allows you to set the legend that shows the colors of the displayed map;
6. Overlay rebars, allows you to overlay rebars on the commitment diagram

displayed
7. Sections, displays the sectional subdivision used in the reinforcement calculation
8. Sections, displays the window containing the list of cross sections inserted into the drawing
of the beam reinforcement
9. Select group view, allows you to activate the display of only the desired groups. For
To carry out the operation, select the groups using the mouse and then finish with the ENTER key
10. Stall glass detail, allows you to view the reinforcement detail window
designed for the glasses present in the audience.
The visible menu items depend on the drawing currently displayed.
16.5 Stratigraphy visualization

The stratigraphy views can be activated from the button on the Views command bar.
When the Stratigraphy button is selected, the bar that allows you to
choose one of the four views provided.
Survey points. Allows you to view the location of the survey points in the plan
Work. The survey points are the same used for the definition of the stratigraphy.
Stratigraphic columns. Allows you to view the corresponding stratigraphic section

of the three defined columns.
Section in the X and Y direction. They allow you to perform a section in a vertical plane
X and Y direction of the stratigraphy and foundation. To be able to execute the section, it is activated
the view and click inside the work plane. Upon clicking, the section with the is displayed
description of the intersected land and, if the section intercepts the foundation, it is displayed
also the geometry of the sectioned foundation.
16.6 Viewing pile results

146
When the Poles button is selected, the Poles Results bar appears, allowing you to
select the following views:
Allows you to view the distribution of horizontal forces on the plan on the individual piles
foundation. The poles are colored according to the discharges to which they are subject. Poles can
be questioned.
Clicking with the mouse on a pole displays the Pole nr... window which reports:
– Pole diameter (D), expressed in [L2];
– Pole length (L), expressed in [L1];
– Head moments in the X and Y direction (Mx, My), expressed in [F1xL1];
– Head cut in X and Y direction (Tx, Ty), expressed in
[F1];
– Normal effort in the head (N), expressed in [F1];
– Lateral lift (Pl), expressed in [F1]. If the legislation
choice is the NTC 2008 or NTC 2018 the lateral bearings
shown in the table are two: average lateral lift
(Pl_med) and minimum (Pl_min);
– Peak lift (Pp) expressed in [F1]. If the chosen regulation is NTC 2008 or NTC 2018 le
There are two peak lifts reported in the table: average peak lift (Pp_med) and minimum
(Pp_min);
– Weight of the pile (Wp), expressed in [F1];
– Allowable lift (Pa), expressed in [F1]. If the chosen regulation is NTC 2008 or NTC 2018
the lift indicated is the design lift (Pd);
– Cutting in limit conditions at the head (Tu), expressed in [F1].
It allows you to view Moment, Shear, Normal Effort, Ground Pressure and Displacements
in limit conditions of the pile. To select a pole just click in its vicinity with the
left mouse button.
By clicking with the left mouse button inside the diagrams, a window appears
which shows the characteristics of the current section:
– ordinate along the pole shaft (Y), expressed in [L2];
– the limit moment (Mr), expressed in [F1xL1];
– the limit cut (Tr), expressed in [F1];
– the limit normal stress (Nr), expressed in [F1];
– the limit horizontal displacement (ur), expressed in [L2];
– the limit pressure on the ground (pr), expressed in [P1].
It allows you to view Moment, Shear, Normal Effort, Ground Pressure and Displacements
under operating conditions of the pole. To select a pole just click on it next to the
mouse.
By clicking with the left mouse button inside the diagrams, a window appears
which shows the characteristics of the current section:
– ordinate along the pole shaft (Y), expressed in [L2];
– the operating moment (M), expressed in [F1xL1];
– the operating cut (T), expressed in [F1];
– the normal operating effort (N), expressed in [F1];
– the operating horizontal displacement (u), expressed in [L2];
– the operating pressure on the ground (p), expressed in [P1].
It is possible to modify the graphic settings of the limit and exercise diagrams using the
<Pole Diagram Options> window described later
It allows you to view the vertical and horizontal load-settlement diagram of the pile.
The diagram presents the value of the settlement on the abscissa and the value of the load on the ordinate.
By right-clicking within the graphical view, you can call from
pop-up menu the Load Failure Diagram window which shows:
– the vertical force (load-settlement diagram
vertical) or horizontal (load diagram
horizontal settlement), expressed in [F1];
– the vertical settlement (load diagram
vertical settlements) or horizontal displacements
(horizontal load-settlement diagram),
expressed in [L2];
– the rotation, expressed in [°].
By clicking on the button you can choose whether to dimension all points and the scale of
representation of the load-settlement diagram.

148
It allows you to view the pile reinforcements with the related stress diagrams
moment and shear, limit and exercise.
Cut. The program allows cutting the longitudinal reinforcement of the pile, in order to
differentiate the armor itself into two sections. The cutting point is entered by the User in such a way
graphic or through the Modify pile reinforcement window. Selected the button, the
program is prepared to cut the pole reinforcement. To carry out the
cutting you need to move the mouse pointer to the cutting position and click. The
program will insert a point (highlighted by a red square) and will break it
the dimension line appropriately and to insert the cross section relating to the new one
treatment. The cutting point can be changed graphically by dragging with the
mouse, or numerically.
To graphically delete the cutting point, simply move the point itself outside
of the length of the pole. The program will automatically delete the
cross section that is not of interest.
The inserted cross sections can be moved, within the area of interest,
simply by placing the mouse pointer near the section to be moved,
by clicking with the left mouse button and holding it down, move to the new one
position.
With the same graphical procedure it is possible to move: the stress diagrams, the
commitment diagram, the longitudinal section of the pile, the row characteristics table.
Information. When the button is clicked, the program displays the Edit Reinforcement window
pole/Pole information which allows you to modify the pole rods or obtain information on the
selected pole. The description of the window is reported in the following paragraphs.
Pole reinforcement graphic options. When the button is clicked, the program displays the window
Pole graphics options that allows you to set the diagrams and scales represented.
Domain breaking. After activating the button, clicking along the shaft of the pole comes
the MN diagram relating to the chosen point is displayed. If you press the Shift key when clicking,
the moment-curvature diagram is also displayed.
The two buttons allow you to view the pressure-bending, shear and cracking checks in tabular form.
To scroll through the graphic results relating to the views listed above you can use the buttons below
reported:
16.6.1 Pile diagram settings

The window displayed by the button allows you to set some parameters for the
display of limit and operating diagrams of the active pile.
16.6.2 Modification of pile reinforcement
The Edit Post Reinforcement window appears when the button is selected
Command bar information Post results and when the posts are in ca
From the window you can change the armor

designed. In particular it is possible to define:
– The Break Pole Armor check is used to
activate armor cutting in two sections;
- Quote. Height compared to the head of the pole
cutting point, expressed in [L1]. The field of is
active if the Break item has been enabled
pole armor;
– Both for the upper stroke and for the stroke
lower can be set:
ÿ Number of irons;
ÿ Rod diameter, expressed in [L3];

ÿ Stirrup pitch, expressed in [L2];
ÿ Bracket diameter, expressed in [L3].
16.6.3 Pole information

150
The Pole Information window appears when the Information button is selected
of the Pile Results command bar and when the piles are with tubular or generic reinforcement.
The window contains general information
on the pole.
If the pole has tubular reinforcement:
– Perforation diameter, expressed in [L2];
– External tubular diameter, expressed in [L3];
– Tubular thickness, expressed in [L3].
If the pole has a generic section:
– Diameter, expressed in [L2];
– Area, expressed in [L2]x[L2];
– Inertia, expressed in [L2]4;
– Resistance modulus, expressed in [L2]3.
16.6.4 Pole commitment diagram display options
The Pole Graphics Options window appears when it appears
the Pole Reinforcement Graphics Options button on the bar is selected
of commands Pole Results. The window allows you to set:
– choice of diagram to display;
– choice of diagram width;
– cross-section display;
– row characteristics window display.
16.7 Viewing failure results
When the Releases and Tensions button is selected, the command bar is displayed
Terrain interaction that allows you to select the following views:

Sagging. Allows you to view the settlements suffered by the foundation. The failure comes
initially displayed on the notable points of the foundation (contour points and at the points of
unloading of the pillars for a slab foundation, in the center of gravity of the plinths, the point of
intersection of beams and the midpoint for a beam trellis).
If you want to know the failure in other points, in addition to the points proposed by the program, by clicking
on the button the calculation phase of the settlement at the mouse click point is activated.
By confirming the position in the table shown, the program adds a new one to the calculated points
point with associated settlements.
If you instead want to view the list of points in which the settlements have been calculated, by clicking on
button it is possible to recall the Settlements window in which the list of points is shown
(abscissa and ordinate, expressed in [L1]) in which the settlements, the value of the settlement and
the index of the element to which it refers (pillar, beam, plinth, etc.).
Differential settlements Displays the differential settlement values at the points

notable of the foundation in SLE combinations only.
Horizontal tension bulb. Allows you to view the voltage trend (bulb
of tensions) in a horizontal plane parallel to the installation surface. By activating the sight, it comes
a section of the foundation and stratigraphic profile is displayed together with a message
which invites us to identify with the mouse the level below the foundation where we can find out
the tension state.
Vertical tension bulb. Allows you to view the voltage trend (bulb of
tensions) in a vertical plane. By activating the view, the floor plan of the building is displayed
foundation along with a message inviting you to locate with the mouse pointer
two points and the direction of the vertical plane where the stress state is known.
Stresses along a vertical direction. Allows you to view the voltage trend
along a vertical axis. By activating the view, the foundation plan is displayed

152
together with a message inviting you to locate a point below the with the mouse
foundation where to know the state of tension.
The drawing represents: the stratigraphic trend and, in a panel with a blue background, veins
represented the trend of the geostatic tensions v0 (green line), of the overpressures
(red line) and the overall voltages v (yellow colored diagram).
Clicking inside the diagram displays the
Stress state window which shows:
– the query ordinate, expressed in [L1];
– the geostatic tension ÿv0, expressed in [P1];
– the overpressure voltages ÿÿ, expressed in [P1];
– the overall voltage ÿv, expressed in [P1].
If you want to know the stress state along a vertical parallel to the one identified, that's it
click to the right or left at the bottom of the voltage diagram representation, and the
program automatically updates the drawing.
Stresses along a horizontal direction. Allows you to view the voltage trend
along a horizontal axis. By activating the view, the foundation plan is displayed
together with a message inviting you to locate two points with the mouse pointer and the
direction of the vertical plane where the stress state is known.
In the drawing, the trend of the voltages is represented in a panel with a blue background
overall ÿv (diagram highlighted in yellow).
Clicking inside the diagram displays the Stress State window in which
are reported:
– the query abscissa, expressed in [L1];
– the overpressure voltages ÿÿ, expressed in [P1];
If you want to know the stress state along another horizontal parallel to the one identified,
just click above or below the voltage diagram representation, and the
program automatically updates the drawing.
Ground pressures. Allows you to view the pressure trend on the surface
foundation. By activating the view, the foundation plan with a map is displayed
color representative of the present tension state.
Clicking in the drawing displays the Ground Pressures window which shows:
– the identified element (beam, plinth, etc.) and the index;
– the number of the calculation model node and its position
(abscissa and ordinate, expressed in [L1]);
– the pressure at the foundation surface at that point, expressed
in [P1];
– the determined settlement, expressed in [L2];

– the stiffness of the foundation soil (Winkler's constant), expressed in [P1 / L2]. If the calculation is
been performed with the interaction model (Winkler's constant is a result of the analysis) and is
variable point by point while, if the calculation was performed with the Winkler model (the
Winkler constant is a given).
Winkler constant. Displays the map of the Winkler constant values

foundation
16.8 Viewing Movement Results
The views on the movements can be activated either from the Views menu or from the button on the
Views command bar.
When the Navigation button is selected, the command bar appears
allows you to select the following views:
Vertical displacement (w). If used as a model of interaction between terrain and
foundation the Winkler model, the vertical displacements of the plate coincide with i
ground settlements while, if the interaction model is used, the displacements of the
foundation in one point may not coincide with the ground settlements).
Example: Interaction model
Plinth with resulting vertical loads N = 131500 kg and moment M = 180000 kgm.
The plinth, due to the load, tends to collapse, lifting on one side (white band in the
diagram of the vertical displacements of the plate) while the settlements (the lowerings) of the
soil are all positive.
Vertical plate movements Land subsidence

154
Movement in the X direction (UX).
Movement in Y direction (UY).
By clicking with the left mouse button inside the diagrams, the window is displayed
Nodal movements in which the following information is reported:
– Index of the calculation model node;
– Abscissa and Ordinate of the node (X and Y), expressed in [L1];

– Vertical displacement (w), expressed in [L2];
– Rotation around the X and Y axis (fx, fy), expressed in [°];

– Movement in X (UX), Y (UY) and resulting (U) directions,
expressed in [L2];
– the pressure at the foundation level, expressed in [P1], if the calculation is for a foundation;
– the unloading at the head of the pile (Npole), expressed in [F1], if the queried node is common to the head of
a pole;
– the constraint reaction (R), expressed in [F1], if the queried node is constrained.
Deformed in the XY plane.
16.9 Displaying bending and shear stresses/tensions
membrane
When the Stresses button is selected, the command bar appears
which allows you to select the following views:

Mx. Bending moment X with vector axis parallel to the Y axis (positive if it strains the fibers
lower), expressed in [F1xL1].
My. Bending moment Y with vector axis parallel to the X axis (positive if it strains the fibres
lower), expressed in [F1xL1].
Mxy. XY bending moment, expressed in [F1xL1].
Direction of main moments.
Normal membrane tension in the X direction (x) (positive if compressive), expressed

in [P1];
Normal membrane tension in Y direction (y) (positive if compressive), expressed
in [P1];
Tangential membrane tension in the XY direction ( xy), expressed in [P1].

Main directions of tension.
By clicking with the left mouse button inside the diagrams, the window is displayed
Nodal stresses in which the following information is reported:
– Node identifier;
– Abscissa and Ordinate of the node (X and Y), expressed in [L1];
– Moments in the X and Y directions (Mx, My, Mxy),
expressed in [F1 x L1];
– If the element used for the plate calculation is a
shear deformability, cuts in the X and Y directions
(Tx, Ty), expressed in [F1];
Diagram. Allows you to view the trend of stresses along a direction

horizontal and vertical in the foundation plane. By activating the view, the
foundation plan together with the elements of the calculation model. By clicking inside the foundation
you can view the diagram along the chord respectively
selected.
16.10 Viewing required armor
When the Required Reinforcement button is selected, the command bar appears
which allows you to select the following views:
Reinforcement area required lower edge in X direction
Reinforcement area required upper edge X direction
Reinforcement area required lower edge Y direction
Reinforcement area required upper edge Y direction
The displayed diagram can be queried. By clicking on the diagram, the

Required reinforcements window – X or Y direction which shows the following information:
– abscissa (X) and ordinate (Y) of the interrogated point, expressed in [L1];

156
– the area of reinforcement required at the upper edge per meter (Area
sup) in the chosen direction, expressed in [L22 ]. They come
two values are reported: the first is the total reinforcement per metre
arranged in the section while the second is the calculation armature
additional outside mesh;
– the area of reinforcement required at the edge less than one meter (Area
inf) in the chosen direction, expressed in [L22 ]. They come
two values are reported: the first is the total reinforcement per metre
arranged in the section while the second is the calculation armature
additional outside mesh;
– the positive (Mp) and negative (Mn) moments used for the structural bending verification
of the section, expressed in [F1 × L1];
– the positive (Np) and negative (Nn) normal stress used for the structural verification a
section bending, expressed in [F1];
– the positive (Tp) and negative (Tn) shear used for the structural shear verification of the section,
expressed in [F1].
NOTE:
The calculation nodal stresses are different from the stresses used for verification
structural. The reason for the difference is to be found in the procedure for calculating the stresses
of project. These stresses are evaluated starting from the nodal stresses, evaluated in
trait of competence in a number of variable sections depending on the geometry and variability
of stresses.
16.11 Effort view

When the Task button is selected, the command bar appears
allows you to select the following views:

Armor direction.
Reinforcement commitment in the X direction.
Reinforcement commitment in Y direction.
Commitment to pressure-bending.
Cut commitment
Commitment to crack checks.
Check punching.
Check glasses.
Breakdown domain visualization
Values commitment. Allows you to open, once you have selected the object you want to see
detail, the window in which the numerical values of the checks are shown.
16.11.1 Commitment query
The displayed diagram can be queried via mouse click.

When viewing the commitment diagram, clicking displays the Section checks window –
X or Y direction which reports the following information:
– Index of the section (It) and section (Is);
– abscissa (X) and ordinate (Y), expressed in [L1];
– area of reinforcement required per meter at the upper edge
(Afs), expressed in [L22 ];
– Reinforcement area required per meter at the lower edge (Afi),
expressed in [L22 ];
Design at allowable tensions
– tension in the upper bars (ÿfs), expressed in [P1];
– tension in the lower irons (ÿfi), expressed in [P1];
– tension in the concrete (ÿc), expressed in [P1];
– tension in the concrete (ÿc), expressed in [P1].

158
Limit state design

– section safety coefficient (CS);
– last moment in the section (Mu), expressed in [F1 × L1];
– ultimate normal stress in the section (Nu), expressed in [F1];
– the calculation stress shear (T), expressed in [F1];
– the resistant shear of the longitudinal reinforcement only,
expressed in [F1];
– the shear absorbed by the concrete, expressed in [F1];
– the shear absorbed by the shear reinforcement (shaped or stirrups), expressed in [F1].
In the “Cup checks” and “Punching check” views , when you click on the object they appear
the following windows appear:
16.12 Visualization of beam stresses

This view shows the drawing of the beams with the relative stress diagram chosen
through the buttons described below.
Moments.
Cut.
Normal effort.
Detail that displays the Beam Stress window.
16.12.1 Detail of beam stresses
The table shows:

• n°, index of the beam section;
• N, normal stress, expressed in [F1];
• T, shear in the vertical plane, expressed in [F1];
• M, moment in the vertical plane, expressed in [F1 L1];
• Th, shear in the horizontal plane, expressed in [F1];
• Mh, moment in the horizontal plane, expressed in [F1 L1].
16.13 Visualization of beam reinforcements
When the Beam Reinforcements button is selected, the foundation plan is displayed
with all the beams colored according to the selected view:
pressure-flexing iron area.
pressure-flexion commitment

160
shear commitment
commitment to verify cracking

.
By viewing the single beam (via the query object button ) the drawing is composed
Of:
• longitudinal section of the beam appropriately dimensioned
• cross sections inserted, with exploded view of the reinforcements
• list of reinforcements with partial and total dimensions of the bars
• pressure-flexion engagement diagram
• cutting commitment diagram
The command bar on the right allows you to perform the following operations:
List of irons. Clicking the button displays the List of beam bars table, which shows the list of
needles with relative length, diameter and number of rods. The description of the window is reported in the
following paragraphs.
New silhouette. Clicking the button displays the Shape Insertion table which allows you to
insert new bars into the beam. The description of the window is given in the paragraphs
following.
Edit iron. After selecting a club, clicking the button displays the Bar table
n° .- Beam n° which allows the numerical modification of the selected shape. The description
of the window is reported in the following paragraphs.

Edit brackets. Clicking the button displays the Stirrup Sections - Beam No. table that allows
to modify the bracket sections designed for the beam. The window description comes
reported in the following paragraphs.
Clear iron. After selecting a club, if you press this button or the [Delete] key
of the keyboard, the iron is eliminated and the list is updated.
Size iron. Once the button is selected, the program prepares to carry out the cutting of the
Shape. To make the cut you need to move the mouse pointer to the position
cut and click. Once the cut has been made, the list will contain the two rows generated.
Move iron. Once the button is selected, the program prepares to carry out the procedure
movement of the shape. To move, you need to move the pointer
mouse on the iron to be moved, press the left mouse button and, keeping the button pressed,
move the iron to the new position. When the button is released the iron takes on the new one
position.
The combination of the left mouse button + [Shift] key on the keyboard allows you to move the
iron along the section of the beam.
Sections. Allows you to insert cross sections of the beam simply by clicking
along the longitudinal section. The sections show the reinforcements present and can be
moved graphically by dragging with the mouse. The <Sections> item of the pop-up
allows you to access the window for manipulating the sections present
Checks. Allows you to view the table containing the numerical values of the checks
press-bending/shear
Checks. Allows you to view the tables containing the numerical values respectively
of crack checks
All operations that make changes to the armor lead the program to carry out
again the checks of all the calculation sections of the beam, and any exceedances
tensions in the materials are immediately indicated on the engagement diagram displayed.
16.13.1 List of beam rods

162
The List of beam No. rods window can be accessed by clicking on the List of rods button on the toolbar
of the Beam reinforcement commands. The table contains the following information:
– Iron type (long upper, long lower, shaped upper or shaped lower);
– Length of the bar, expressed in [L2];
– Number of irons (or bars);
– Diameter of the bars, expressed in [L3].
If one of the clubs in the list is selected
in graphics it is highlighted in red, so

so that it can be easily identified.
16.13.2 Insertion of beam iron
The Shape Insertion window can be accessed by clicking on the New Shape button
Beam reinforcement command bar.
From the window it is possible to insert new shapes into the

distinct armor proposed by the program. In the window it is
can set:
– the shape to insert, selectable from the Type section,
Choice of long straight upper and lower needles and needles
upper and lower shaped;
– number of rods;
– initial and final abscissa, expressed in [L2];
– shaping abscissa, for lower shaped and upper shaped irons, expressed in
[L2].
The squares are automatically set by the program to the value set in the
Beam reinforcement options. If you need to change the geometry of the brackets, later
having inserted the new shape, you can modify them by following the modification procedure described
in the next paragraph.
16.13.3 Modify beam iron
The Edit Bar No. - Beam No. window can be accessed by clicking on the Edit Bar No. button
command bar Beam reinforcement, after selecting the iron with the mouse. From the window it is
It is possible to define the geometry of the iron to be modified. In the window you can set:
– number of rods;
– initial (X1) and final (X2) abscissa of the section
active, expressed in [L2];
– if the iron to be modified is a shaped one,
the shaping abscissa (Xs), expressed in [L2];
– length of the left vertical brackets e
right (LVs and LVd) and left and horizontal
right (LHs and LHd), expressed in [L2].
16.13.4 Modification of beam brackets
The Stirrup Sections - Beam No. window can be accessed by clicking on the Edit stirrups button
Beam reinforcement command bar. From the table it is possible to define the arrangement of the brackets.
– section identifier (N°);
– initial (Xi) and final (Xf) abscissa of the section, expressed in [L2];
– number of section brackets;
– pitch of the stirrups in the section,
expressed in [L2];
– diameter of brackets,
expressed in [L3].
16.13.5 Odds Options
The window is displayed by clicking on the Dimensions button on the Tools command bar or
by clicking on the item of the same name in the Tools menu when you are in the Beam Reinforcements view.
It is possible to customize the armor design by activating/deactivating:
– the dimensioning of bars;
– dimensioning of bracket sections;
– the dimensioning of beams;

164
– display of the commitment diagram.
It is possible to define:
– the character height total dimensions;
– the character height of partial dimensions;
– the distance of the list from the beam, expressed in [L2];
– the distance between the bars, expressed in [L2];
– the distance of the total height of the iron;
– the distance of the partial height of the iron;
– the distance of the height of the brackets, expressed in [L2];
– the distance of the beam dimensioning, expressed in [L2].
– the display of the reference (Beam no. ..) in the list
16.14 Display of plate / plinth reinforcements
The views on the plates and plinths reinforcements can be activated by the button on the
Views command bar.
If plinths and plate are present at the same time, the are displayed in the assembly view
reinforcements only in plan. The complete list of items is displayed in the single object view
reinforcements, For the plinths, the detail view includes not only the plan but also a view with the two
sections (X and Y), including any glass present. The displayed sections can be moved in the window by dragging with
the mouse.
When the single object is selected, the command bar that allows it is displayed
to select the following views:
New silhouette. Clicking the button displays the New club table
allows you to insert new irons into the soleplate. The description of the window is shown in
following paragraphs.
Edit iron. After selecting a club, clicking on the button displays the table
Edit group which allows you to edit the single club or the selected group. There
description of the window is reported in the following paragraphs.
Clear iron. After selecting a club (or a group), if you press this button
or the [Delete] key on the keyboard, the club (or group) is deleted and the list is updated
distinct. Alternatively you can select the Delete rows item from the pop-up menu. There
description of the Delete rows window is reported in the following paragraphs.
List of irons. Clicking the button displays the Plate Iron List table, which displays the list
of the irons with relative position, direction, type, length, diameter and number of rods. There
description of the window is reported in the following paragraphs.
Section. Clicking the button activates the plate section phase, which allows you to carry out operations
cross sections of the plate. The button is not active for footing foundations. For
To carry out the section, just move the mouse to the point to be sectioned and click the button
left.
A single click of the mouse allows you to carry out the section in the X direction while, the
The combination of Shift key on the keyboard + mouse click allows you to make the section in
Y direction.

166
Armor graphics options. Clicking the button displays the Options window
armor that allows you to set/modify the view of the bars. The description of the
window is reported in the following paragraphs.
16.14.1 Iron insertion
The New bar window can be accessed by clicking on the New shape button on the toolbar
Plate armor commands. From the window it is possible to insert new shapes into the reinforcement list
proposed by the program. In the window you can set the specifications of the group to insert:
– Number of rows or pitch;
– Direction of the irons (X and/or Y);

– Initial and final abscissa and/or ordinate
of the silhouettes, expressed in [L2];

– Ordinate and/or Abscissa of the initial mesh
and final, expressed in [L2];
– Flap (upper or lower);

– Diameter of the rods, expressed in [L3].
– The check treats like knitted needles,
tells the program that the irons of

inserted must be considered as
knitting needles.
16.14.2 Modification of iron
From the window it is possible to modify the selected shape.

– Initial (Xi or Yi) and final (Xf or Yf) abscissa or ordinate, expressed in [L2];
– the shaping abscissa, for shaped irons,
expressed in [L2];
– Diameter of the iron, expressed in [L3];
– Horizontal and vertical square lengths,
expressed in [L2].
Furthermore, other information is provided:
Iron type, arrangement flap, direction,
length, number of needles in the group, weight of
single bar and group.
The apply changes button starts the verification on the
changes made to the templates.
16.14.3 List of plate/plinth irons no. …
The table contains the following information:

– Iron type (long or shaped);
– Flap (upper or lower);
– Direction (X or Y);
– Initial and final abscissa of the shape in the case of bars in the X direction (Xi, Xf), expressed in [L2];
– Initial and final ordinate of the shape in the case of bars in the Y direction (Yi, Yf), expressed in [L2];
– Ordinate of the bar in plan (Y), in the case of bars in the X direction, expressed in [L2];
– Abscissa of the iron in the plan (X), in the case of irons in the Y direction, expressed in [L2];
– Length of the iron, expressed in [L2];

168
– Diameter of the iron, expressed in [L3].

The following selectors are also present in the window:
– Armor …., allows you to report in the table only the irons arranged on the lower edge, on the edge
superior or both;
– Irons… allows you to report individual irons (F) or groups (G) in the table. Viewing the needles for
groups, the table shows another column in which the number of rods is reported
of the group.
If one of the irons in the graphic list is selected, it is highlighted in red, so as to
be able to easily identify it.
16.14.4 Armor graphics options
The Reinforcement Graphics Options window can be accessed

by clicking on the Armor Graphics Options button
Plate reinforcement command bar or by clicking on the item
namesake of the Tools menu when in the view
Plate armor.
From the window it is possible to issue commands on the
visualization and on the dimensions of the bars.
The window is divided into View and Options sections.
In the View section you can choose your irons
view (all rows, off rows or only those of
mesh), the direction (main, secondary or both), the
position (bottom, top, or both).
In the Options section you can communicate to
program if the plant irons must be dimensioned, the
position of the dimensioning and, if the choice on the latter
parameter falls on the callout, color and position of
the latter. You can also set up a view with groups
of different colour.
16.14.5 Reinforcement drawing options
• the distance of the list from the plan of the
foundation, expressed in [L2];
• the dimensioning of the bars (length of the individual sections);
• the dimensioning of the groups (number and diameter of bars);
• the dimensioning of the plan and sections;
• the position of the sections chosen between: top, in
low, left and right;
• display it on the group indicator;
• the position of the indicator with respect to the iron;
• display of executives on glasses;

• the position of the list of glasses chosen from: in
low and to the right.
16.14.6 Detail of structural checks
The window is divided into three panels, not visible at the same time: Bending, Cutting and
Tensions. Depending on the selected combination, one or more panels are shown.
If the combination is at ULS and limit state verification has been requested, two are activated
panels: Bending and Shear.
The Bend panel contains:

• the section identifier;
• Afi, area of the lower irons, expressed in [L2^2];
• Afs, area of the upper bars, expressed in [L2^2];
• Mp and Mn, positive and negative moment, expressed in [F1 L1];
• Np and Nn, positive and negative normal stress, expressed in [F1];
• Mu, ultimate moment, expressed in [F1 L1];

170
• Nu, ultimate normal stress, expressed in [F1].

• FS, safety factor (ratio between ultimate and calculation stress).
The Cut panel contains:
• B, basis of the verification section, expressed in [L1];

• H, height of the verification section, expressed in [L1]; •
VRcd, calculated shear-compression resistance, expressed in [F1]; • VRsd,
shear-tensile calculation resistance, expressed in [F1]; • VRd, design
shear resistance, expressed in [F1]. This value is the lower between VRsd and
VRcd for sections with shear-resistant transversal reinforcement and for elements without
shear-resistant transverse armor, represents shear-resistant;
• T, height of the verification section, expressed in [F1];
• FS, safety factor, ratio between VRd and T;
• cot_theta, inclination of the concrete struts.
If the combination is at ULS and the tension check has been requested (only for the foundation
surface) two panels are activated: Tensions and Shear.
The Tensions panel contains:
• Afi, area of the lower irons, expressed in [L2^2];
• Afs, area of the upper bars, expressed in [L2^2];
• sc, compressive stress in the concrete, expressed in [P1];
• tc, shear stress in the concrete, expressed in [P1]. This value is not present if you check it
is conducted with the NTC 2008 or NTC 2018 as the shear verification is always a
verification at the ultimate limit state.
• sfi, tension in the lower irons, expressed in [P1];

• sfs, tension in the upper bars, expressed in [P1].
For cutting see above.
If the combination is tensional, only the Tensions panel is activated whose content is the one seen
above.
16.14.7 Glass armor detail
In the view of the stall reinforcements, by activating the item <Stand glass detail> in the pop-up
menu, it is possible to display the window showing a detailed plan and section view
of the armor of the chosen glass.
The current drawing can be exported to DXF:
The buttons on the bar allow you to scroll through the glasses present.

172
4.15pm Graphic layout designer
The graphic layout designer is displayed by the Layout button on the horizontal bar
of the graphics window.
The layout of the selected drawings is performed automatically when the window is opened
in question. This operation controls the size of the drawings.
It is possible to position the drawings on the sheet by dragging with the mouse.
The upper horizontal bar contains commands for centering drawings, setting the scale and
start printing.
displays the Drawing Scale window
On the lower horizontal bar there are the following buttons:
selection of the single drawing, and movement by dragging with the mouse
deletion of the single selected design or of all the inserted designs
displays the Drawing List window

displays the Drawing Scale window
activate/deactivate snapping;
returns the current page. The two buttons allow you to scroll through the pages.
By clicking with the right mouse button on the window, a menu containing the
following items:
ÿ Cut, allows you to cut the selected design
ÿ Paste, allows you to paste the previously cut drawing onto the current page
16.15.1 Layout options
In the modal window it is possible to set: ÿ scale factor
of drawings for printing; ÿ distance between drawings;
ÿ horizontal centering of the
drawings;
ÿ vertical centering of the drawings;
ÿ insertion or not of identical designs.
The [Delete All] button deletes all inserted designs.
From the [Drawings] button you can view the list of
layout drawings.

174
16.16 Insertion of captions
You can insert multiple captions for each drawing displayed in the graphics environment. To access
in the window shown in the figure, click on the Insert caption button on the image bar
graphical environment options.
ÿ the text to be reported on the active drawing;
ÿ the type, the style, the size, the

effects and font color
by clicking on the button
[Characters>>];
ÿ the rotation of the inserted text
expressed the degrees.
16.17 List of captions
The grid, displayed from the Caption List item in the pop-up menu, allows you to insert a
unlimited number of captions on all drawings displayed in the graphics window.
ÿ In the View column, through the combo-box present, you select the drawing to which to attribute the
caption.
ÿ In the Text column, enter the text that will appear on the drawing.
ÿ The X and Y columns allow you to define the position of the caption on the drawing.
ÿ The A(°) column allows you to define the rotation angle of the inserted text.
ÿ In the Font column you choose the character with which to write the caption.
In addition to changing the X and Y coordinates, the captions can be moved on the drawing
by dragging with the mouse.
To deactivate all inserted captions, disable the Enable captions check-box.
To deactivate a single caption, select the item in the combo box of the corresponding row
Deactivate.
It is possible to insert suffixes in the captions that facilitate text input:

testdodascalia_COMB The caption contains the number of the combination to which the
drawing refers.
Testdodascalia_SCALA The scale defined for the drawing is inserted in the caption.
Example:
displaying the drawing relating to the moment for combination 5, if we type the text
"Stress Moment*combination nr_COMB, the caption will appear on the drawing

“Stress Moment*combination no. 5”.
It is also possible to insert text formatting into the captions:
__S caption text __S The caption text is in Symbol format
__B caption text __B The caption text is in bold style
__I caption text __I The caption text is in italic style
__U captiontext __U The caption text has single underlining
16.18 View options
In the window it is possible to set the drawing representation options. Most of the
options are self-explanatory. Just some of the options are described:
• optimal zoom change view, if active allows you to center the entire drawing when changing the view
view.
• object color by: section, type, material and Winkler constant, allows you to
represent the structure according to the colors assigned to the various objects so that they can
easily control.

176
16.19 Odds options
In the window it is possible to define the characteristics of the dimensions of the plate and plinth structures:
• activate the drawing of the dimensions;
• define the distance of the total horizontal and vertical dimensions from the plan, expressed in [L2];
• define the distance of the partial horizontal and vertical dimensions from the plan, expressed in [L2].
17 3D graphics
In API++ there is an additional graphics window with a three-dimensional view of all the inserted objects.
In this window you can view the geometry of the structure you are analyzing, with
related results.
The window consists of a central part where the various results are reported and two bars
arranged on the perimeter of the window (bottom and top) which allow you to manage the views of the
results and design.
One of the most interesting features of API is certainly the management of the graphical environment. Yes
it is a streamlined, fast and powerful tool that allows the designer to "see" all the
choices made and quickly “navigate” among the analysis results.
Top bar
These buttons allow you to change views: geometry,

displacements, stresses, reinforcements
The button activates the query phase in the stress view
Bottom bar
Drawing management: zoom, move, rotate,

work plan
Model view: solid, render, wire.
View options: light, viewed objects, etc
Smile combinations analyzed

178
18 Report Menu
From the commands in this menu it is possible to generate the calculation report.
The program generates the calculation report in RTF format and allows you to edit it using an editor
external detected automatically by the program.
From this menu it is possible to access the window for entering the unit prices which will allow the
plan to carry out the estimated metric calculation of the planned work.
18.1 Generate report
The Generate calculation report window can be accessed from the menu item of the same name
Report or from the accelerator button on the command bar.
In the window, available to the User, there are various generation options
calculation report. Each option represents a module in the relationship.
In particular it is possible to set:
– General data (name of the project, company, designer,
etc.);
– the relevant regulations;
– theoretical references on analysis methods;
– the problem data (geometry of the foundation,
soils, stratigraphy, loads, calculation combinations,
etc.);
– the combinations to print by clicking on the button
[Combinations to print] can be selected
the combinations for which to print the results;
– the Results on the nodes and elements, by clicking on
[Opt.] button nodes/elements] it is possible to set whether
and which results to print (displacements, stresses,
etc.);
– Plate Results;
– the Results on the plinths;

– the Results on the beams;
– the Results on the poles;
– Results on settlements, when the foundation is superficial;

– the list of designed irons;
– the printing of errors allows you to also report any non-compliant checks
satisfied.
For each object to be printed it is possible to set a series of options in the relevant windows.
The [File Select] button allows you to select the saving path and the file name in which
you want to generate the calculation report. The file selection procedure is the same as the
standard Windows Save As procedure.
18.1.1 Relationship combination options
It is possible to access the Combination List window
by clicking on the [Combinations to print] button

of the Generate calculation report window.
In the window you can set which combinations
print out. It is possible to choose between all combinations

or select from the list. Depending on the choice made the
program will report the results of all
selected elements (plinths, beams, poles, etc.), for the soles

selected combinations.
18.2 Material calculation
It is possible to access the Materials calculation window

from the Report menu item of the same name.
The window is divided into a number of sections equal to
number of object types present in the geometric model
of the foundation analyzed (plinths, beams, piles, etc.).
For each object the number of elements is indicated, the
volume of concrete, the weight of the reinforcement, the incidence
of the armor, the weight of the brackets, etc.

180
19 Window Menu
This menu contains commands for sorting

modeless windows displayed on the screen.
The activated menu presents the following items:
– Cascade, with which modeless windows come
superimposed.
– Tile, with which modeless windows are arranged side by side and resized
such that they are all visible at the same time.
– Close all, which closes all open modeless windows.
20 Help Menu
API is equipped with a powerful Help system that provides information on operating aspects
of the program, on the theoretical aspects of the analysis methods. It also provides information for
conversion of the quantities used in the program between the various units of measurement and information
on errors that, if necessary, are detected during the analysis of the problem.
The menu in question contains the commands to access some of the parts of the help system.
The menu, once activated, appears as in the figure and the items in it concern:
– Help, this command calls up the Help summary;
– PDF manual, allows you to recall the manual of the
plan;
– Validation examples, allows you to recall a
document containing examples of literature a
comparison with the results obtained from the program;
– Conversions, this command calls the Unit of measurement conversion application, which
allows you to convert quantities from one unit of measurement to another;

– Information, using this command you access the dialog box where it is shown
the User header and the program version.
Once Help has been activated, you can "navigate" the guide using the appropriate hyperlinks
present in each section displayed.

THEORETICAL RECALLS

182
21 Finite element method.
API++ uses the finite element method to calculate plates, plinths and lattices. Inside the
software, various elements suitable for the purpose have therefore been implemented. The elements used are plate
elements for the analysis of plates loaded in their own plane, plate elements for the analysis of plates
loaded orthogonally to the mid-plane, beam elements for the analysis of lattices and ribbed plates,
spring elements for the simulation of foundation soil interaction.
We will briefly describe in this chapter some basic concepts of the finite element method.
The finite element method (FEM) developed starting from the end of the 1950s
It currently represents the most widespread method in the field of both continuum and problem analysis
static and dynamic in linear and non-linear fields.
We leave aside the theoretical aspects of the problem, for which we refer to the vast specialized literature (see
bibliography).
In short, the method divides the continuous medium into many subdomains (called elements) connected to each other
through knots.
For the analysis of flat states (plate and slab) the elements will have a triangular or quadrangular shape. The nodes
coincide with the vertices of the element (vertex nodes) for the simplest elements. Exist
furthermore several elements in which in addition to the vertex nodes we have nodes arranged in correspondence with the
centerline of the sides (side nodes) or even within the element itself.
In the approach to displacements, based on the principle of minimum total potential energy, the
movement within the elements is interpolated via the values of the nodal displacements (which
represent the unknowns of the problem) using appropriate N-form functions
u(x,y)=ÿ Ni ui =N1u1+N2u2+N3u3+…+Nnun
v(x,y)=ÿ Ni vi=N1v1+N2v2+N3v3+…+Nnvn
where the summation is intended to be extended to all the nodes of the element and ui and vi represent the value
of the displacement in the i-th node.
In matrix form
u={u(x,y),v(x,y)}= Nue
The deformation ÿ={ÿx, ÿy, ÿxy} is linked to the displacements u(x,y) and v(x,y) by the relation
ÿ ÿ /ux ÿÿ
ÿ = ÿ ÿ / ÿ vy
ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ//ÿÿ+ÿÿ
uyvx ÿÿÿ
Expressing u and v using the shape functions we obtain
ÿÿ
ÿÿ ÿN/ ux
ii
ÿ = ÿÿ /Nÿ vy
ii
ÿÿÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿNÿ uy
iiÿÿ /N
ÿ +vx
ÿÿÿ ii /ÿ
Using the notation f,x=cf/cx we can write in matrix form

184
ÿ u 1ÿ
v1
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ u2 ÿ
ÿ No1, x 0 No2 , x 0 . . Nonx, 0 ÿ ÿ ÿ
v2
=
ÿ ÿ
0 No 0 No2 . . 0 Nony,
ÿ ÿ
ÿ 1
year, y, ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ NNNN
ÿ 1
year,
1x, 2, y 2, x . . NNny, nx,
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
un ÿ
ÿ
vn ÿ ÿ
Indicating with B the matrix of the derivatives of the shape functions and with u the vector of the displacements
nodals we therefore have the following relationship which expresses the deformation as a function of
nodal shifts
ÿ = Ox
The stress state inside the element ÿe={ÿx, ÿy, ÿxy} is obtained from the deformations by means of
matrix of elastic constants D which, for isotropic material, is valid
Plane tensions
ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ 0
ÿ ÿ
AND
D = ÿ ÿ 10 ÿ
2
1 ÿ
ÿ ÿ 1 ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
00 ÿ
ÿ 2 ÿ
Plane deformations
ÿ ÿ ÿ
1 0
1
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
And (1 )
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
D = ÿ
1 0 ÿ
(1 + ÿÿ )(1 2 ) ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
12
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
0 0
ÿ ÿ
2(1
ÿ
ÿ )ÿ
ÿ
where E is the Young's modulus and Poisson's modulus of the material.
ÿe= Dÿ = BTwo
Minimum principle of total potential energy
Among all kinematically compatible displacement fields the solution to the elastic problem is
the one that minimizes the total potential energy functional defined as
1 T T T
ub (ÿu)uf dV dV ÿ = ÿ Dÿ ÿ dS
2 ÿÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ
Where b represent the volume forces acting on the R domain and f the forces acting on the ÿR boundary.
Substituting the expressions for u and ÿ previously obtained and minimizing the functional ÿ
we get the expression
Keue=pe
Where
T
=
KB DBdV
and ÿ
ÿ
is the stiffness matrix of the element
ue is the vector of the nodal displacements of the element

And
T T
p = N bÿ + N f dV
And
ÿ
dS
ÿ ÿÿ
is the vector of the nodal loads of the element.
Once the stiffness matrix of each element has been constructed, it is possible to construct the stiffness matrix of the whole
structure through the assembly operation. The same applies to the global load vector.
Therefore the assembly operation will lead to the global system which can be written in the form
Ku=p
Having solved the system we obtain the global displacement vector, u.
Once u is known, it is possible to obtain for each element the local vector of displacements u and therefore la
deformation and stress state.
Isoparametric formulation
The formulation of shape functions in orthogonal xy coordinates is possible only for the
rectangular shaped elements. In the case of generic quadrangular shapes, an element is used
of reference in an orthogonal coordinate system ÿÿ and a mapping system that projects the
real xy coordinates in the reference system ÿÿ. In this system the element is a square with a side
equal to 2 (-1=<ÿ<=1; -1=<ÿ<=1). The shape functions of the element will be expressed in the ÿÿ system. The
The price to pay for the simplification thus introduced is greater difficulty in managing
derivatives and integrals to solve which it is necessary to refer to integration techniques

numerical.
21.1 Bilinear quadrilateral element
Indicate with (x1,y1), (x2,y2), (x3,y3), (x4,y4) the coordinates of the vertices of the element in the system of
global reference XY the generic coordinates of a point inside the element are expressed as

186
x=N1x1+N2x2+ N3x3+N4x4;
y=N1y1+N2y2+ N3y3+N4y4;
where the Ni functions are expressed by
1
No =ÿÿ
(1 ÿ)(1 ÿ) 4
1
No ÿ 214(1 ÿ)(1 ÿ) = +
No 1 = +(1+ ÿ)(1
3 4 1ÿ)=
ÿ+4
No (1 ÿ)(1 ÿ)
4
The same functions are used for interpolation of movements (hence the name of element
isoparametric)
The derivative of a generic function f=f(ÿ,ÿ) with respect to x and y is not directly available and therefore
it is necessary to obtain the Jacobian of the transformation and work with the inverse.
The Jacobian is expressed by the following relation
ÿ
x1 y 1 ÿ
ÿ x, ÿ y, ÿ ÿÿÿ=ÿ NNNN
1,ÿ 3, 4, 2, ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿÿ x2 y 2 ÿ JJ11ÿ ÿ 12 ÿ
J = ÿ ÿÿ
=
y, NNNN
1, ÿ ÿ ÿ 3, 2,
4,ÿ x 3 y 3 JJ21 22 ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ x, ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿÿ
x 4 y 4
ÿÿÿÿ
The derivative with respect to ÿ and ÿ is given by

ÿ f ,ÿ ÿ ÿ f ,x ÿ
= J
ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ f ÿ ,ÿ ÿ
f ÿ ,y ÿ
While the derivative with respect to x and y will be
ÿf ,x ÿ ÿ f ,ÿ ÿ
= J -1
ÿ ÿ
ÿ f ÿ, y ÿ
ÿ f ÿ ,ÿ ÿ
J is generally a function of x and y except for rectangular elements and parallelograms (in this case
the Jacobian is constant).
21.2 Higher order elements
21.2.1 8-node quadrilateral
The 8-node quadrilateral has four nodes at the vertices and 4 nodes on the sides
(preferably in correspondence with the center line of the sides).
The interpolation functions (incomplete quadratic) for the displacements are as follows:
Side knots
1 2
No =ÿ
(1 ÿ )(1 ÿ)
ÿ
5
4
2
No
6 1=+4
(11ÿ)(1 ÿ )
ÿ
2
No = +
7 (1- ÿ )(1 ÿ) 4
1 2
No =ÿ
(1 ÿ)(1- ÿ )
8
4
Vertex nodes
1 1 1 (1 ÿ)(1 ÿ) -
No = ÿÿ
N -5 N8
1
422
1 1 1 (1 ÿ)(1 ÿ) -
No = + ÿ
N -5 N6
2
4 2 2 1 1 1 (1 ÿ)(1 ÿ) -
No = ++ N -6 N7
3
4 2 2 1 1 (1 ÿ)(1 ÿ) -
No
4 1=ÿ+4 N -7 N8
22
Note that the shape functions related to the vertex nodes are the bilinear functions of the element
“correct” bilinear with the contributions of the functions relating to the adjacent side nodes.

188
In addition to the 8-node element, the 9-node element is very widespread, which in addition to the side nodes has a
further node placed in the center of the element (coordinates ÿ, ÿ=0)
This element has a higher accuracy than the 8-node element especially in the case of
distorted elements. This is due to the fact that the introduction of the central node makes the functions of
full quadratic interpolations.
21.3 Triangular elements
21.3.1 3-node triangular element
The displacement interpolation functions are linear functions in the ÿ and ÿ coordinates
The deformation is therefore constant. The element is a node in the literature as Constant Strain Triangle.
The shape functions referring to the 3 vertex nodes are as follows
N1=1-ÿ-ÿ
N2=ÿ
N3=ÿ
21.3.2 6-node triangular element
Place
ÿ=1-ÿ-ÿ
the shape functions for the vertex nodes and the edge nodes are the following quadratic functions. The
deformations have a linear trend. The element is known in the literature as LST (Linear Strange
Triangle).
N1=ÿ(2ÿ-1)
N2=ÿ(2ÿ-1)
N3=ÿ(2ÿ-1)
N4=4ÿÿ
N5=4ÿÿ
N6=4ÿÿ
21.4 Plate elements

The first elements developed in the plate analysis are class C1 elements.
The displacement w(x,y) within the element is expressed as a function of the displacements and
nodal rotations. The nodal rotations coincide with the derivatives of the transverse displacements (hypothesis of
Kirchhoff).
This methodology has been partly abandoned in favor of elements based on shape functions
class C0 with independent interpolations for transversal movements and rotations; these
elements are based on the Reissner-Mindlin theory, present a simpler formulation and
furthermore they can analyze both thick and thin plates. Kirchhoff's hypothesis of deformations
negligible cutting forces, in fact, is not valid in the case of thick plates.
The literature on plate calculation is vast. Dozens, if not hundreds, of have been developed
different elements. From the first Hermitian elements of class C1 we moved on to class C0 elements
based on the Reissner-Mindlin theory. In the latter the movements and rotations are interpolated

190
independently. However, these elements suffered from the problem of cutting locking, i.e. the
displacements are much smaller than the exact solution as the thickness decreases. To solve that
problem, techniques such as reduced and/or selective integration of the stiffness matrix were used. But
If this way of proceeding partially solved the locking problem, it introduced other problems such as
presence of spurious modes.
One of the remedies that has subsequently been resorted to with greater success is that of interpolation in mode
the shear strain field within the element is independent (assumed shear strains). To
For example, the T1 element developed by Hughes and Tezduyar in 1981 used this technique which was
increasingly refined. A different technique is to use mixed elements in which in addition to
interpolating the displacement field independently interpolates the voltage field.
Starting from the 90s, even if the premises are earlier, we began to use the
so-called linked interpolation obtaining elements that certainly have good performance
although implementation is not always easy.
In linked interpolation the displacements and rotations are still interpolated independently
but the movements are then linked to the rotations.
In the following we will briefly describe the Mindlin plate model and some of the elements used in it
API++. For further details you can refer to the texts and publications reported in
bibliography of this chapter.
21.4.1 Kirchhoff plate
Hypothesis: once the deformation has occurred, the sections remain flat and the normal remains at the middle plane of the plate
it remains orthogonal to the axis line.
We indicate with ÿx and ÿy the rotations around the coordinate axes x and y (positive anticlockwise) and with w the
displacement of the midplane (positive upwards). We also denote by u and v the displacements of the
mean plane in the direction of the x and y axes.
The displacement (u, v, w) at each point of the plate is expressed by the following relations:
u(x,y)= -ÿyz = -w,xz = ÿxz
v(x,y)= ÿxz = w,yz = ÿyz
w(x,y)= w =w
In the previous expression we introduced the variables ÿx and ÿy which represent the rotations in
direction of the x and y coordinate axes. In the literature, both the variables ÿ and le are used interchangeably
variables ÿ between which the following relationships exist
ÿx = -ÿy and ÿy = ÿx
The deformations are therefore expressed as
ÿx=du/dx = -w,xx z
ÿy=dv/dy = w,yy z
ÿxy=du/dy+dv/dx = w,xy+w,xy
Strain energy
ÿ = ½ fÿÿdV = ½ fÿDÿdV
Where D is the elastic matrix of the material expressed (plane stress hypothesis) by
ÿÿ ÿÿ
1 ÿ 0
AND
D = ÿ 101
2
1 ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
00
ÿÿÿÿ 2 ÿÿÿÿ
By imposing the minimum condition we obtain the differential equation of the plate

192
ÿ2ÿw+ 2w 2w
ÿ = q
2
ÿ 2x _ ÿy 2 + ÿÿ xy
Where q represents the load per unit area and w the displacement in the direction orthogonal to the plane
plate middle (sag)
21.4.2 Mindlin plate (elements with shear deformability)
Hypothesis: flat sections, the normal to the section is no longer orthogonal to the normal to the average plane
These are elements with continuity class C0. The movements and rotations are interpolated in this way
independent of each other.
The displacement in a generic point of the element is expressed by

w(x,y) = N1 w1+N2 w2+.…+Nn wn
where w1, w2,..wn, are the displacements of the plate nodes
The rotations are interpolated according to the following relations

ÿ x = N1 ÿ x 1 +N2 ÿ x 2 +..Nn ÿ x n
ÿ y = N1 ÿ y 1 +N2 ÿ y 2 +..Nn ÿ y n
Where ÿxi and ÿyi represent the rotations of the i-th node of the element
The rotations of the Mindlin plates are expressed as a function of the displacement and rotations according to the
following relations (expressed both by ÿ and by ÿ)
x y
ÿ x = dw/dx- ÿ ÿ y = dw/dy- ÿ
x y
ÿ y =-dw/dx + ÿ ÿ x = dw/dy- ÿ
Where ÿ represents the sliding of the section due to the shear deformability.
In the case of the Kirchhoff plate the slip term is zero and we have the coincidence between the
rotation of the section ÿ and the rotation of the axis line dw/dx and dw/dy.
21.4.3 DKT element (Discrete Kirchoff Triangle) and DKQ element (Discrete
Kirchoff Quadrilateral)
The development of the DKT and DKQ elements is similar to the development of a Mindlin element. We start from one
independent interpolation for displacements and nodal rotations, then imposing cancellation
of the shear deformability in certain positions.
Therefore, elements are obtained which, despite using a Mindlin-style formulation, do not hold up
account of shear deformability.
We will refer below to the triangular element DKT as the element DKQ is obtained with a
similar procedure.
We start from the 6-node triangular element (8 nodes for the DKQ) with quadratic interpolation of the
rotations starting from the nodal values.
ÿ x = N1 ÿ x 1 +N2 ÿ x2 +N3 ÿ x 3+N4 ÿ x 4+N5 ÿ x 5+N6 ÿ x6
ÿ y = N1 ÿ y 1 +N2 ÿ y 2 +N3 ÿ y 3+N4 ÿ y 4+N5 ÿ y 5+N6 ÿ y 6
The Ni interpolation functions are the complete quadratic ones of the LST element reported in
previous paragraph (refer to the same paragraph also for the numbering of the nodes).
The transverse displacement w is only interpolated along the sides of the element using functions
cubic as a function of the nodal displacements afferent to the side.
l ÿ ÿ w ÿw ÿ
w = 1 2 3ÿ4+ ssw i 3
) 4 1 (2 33 ++ÿ ssw
1+i ) + the
2s ÿÿ
s 1) + +( s 1)
There ÿ 1)
(8 (ÿ
ÿ ti ÿt
i +1 ÿÿ
Where s is the dimensionless curvilinear abscissa along the i-th side with origin at the midpoint of the side e
dw/dt is the derivative of the displacement in the direction tangential to the side.
At this point the following conditions are imposed
ÿ The shear deformation is canceled at the three vertices;
ÿ The shear deformation is canceled at the midpoints of the sides;
ÿ The rotation normal to the sides varies linearly along the sides themselves;
ÿ The rotations are expressed as a function of the displacements wi and the derivatives wxi, wyi of the nodes di
vertex.
By applying all the above constraints, a stiffness matrix of the element of size 9x9 ed is obtained
the degrees of freedom of the element remain only translations and rotations of the vertex nodes.
For further details you can refer to the bibliography.
The DKT element is considered one of the best elements for calculating plates and is always
taken as reference for plate element testing.
21.4.4 DKMT (Discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin Triangle) element and DKMQ element

(Discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin Quadrilateral)
The DKMT and DKMQ elements belong to the same family as the DKT and DKQ elements which a
unlike the former, they take into account the shear deformability. Therefore it is possible to analyze plates
thick in which the shear deformability is not negligible.

194
In the development of these elements, particular attention is paid to avoiding the locking phenomenon
cutting (the solution obtained in the case of thin plates is too "rigid") through interpolations
independent of the shear deformability field.
The bending strain is expressed as
ÿ b =z ÿ
)ÿ
ÿ =
ÿ
ÿ x,x ÿ y,y (ÿ x, y + ÿ y,x
where is the curvature vector.
The shear deformability is expressed by
ÿ = ÿÿ xz ÿ yz
ÿ=
ÿ +w
,x ÿx w, y + ÿ y ÿ
The constitutive equations are expressed for moment and shear by the following relations
ÿM ÿ ÿ ÿ
x ÿ x
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
M = H
ÿ
y
ÿ
b
ÿ ÿ y
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
M
ÿ xy ÿ ÿ ÿ xy ÿ
ÿT x ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
xz
ÿ ÿ
=H ÿ
sÿ
ÿ
ÿ
T ÿ
ÿ y ÿ ÿÿ yz ÿÿ
Where
ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ 0
3 ÿ
Eh
ÿ
= ÿ ÿ 1 0 ÿ
Hb 2
12(1
ÿ
ÿ ) ÿ 1 ÿ
00 (1
ÿ
ÿ )
2
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ kGh 0 ÿ
=
Hs
ÿ 0 kGh ÿ
ÿ ÿ
Being
And Young's modulus of the material

2
G shear modulus of the material G=E/(1-ÿ )
ÿ Poisson modulus of the material
h plate thickness
k shear factor (k=5/6)
ÿ xz ÿ yz
independent shear strain field (assumed shear strains)
Rotations are interpolated using the following expressions

3 6
= No ÿ xi + PC ÿ ÿ sk
ÿ x ÿÿ the kk
the
=1 k=4
3 6
= N +ÿi yi PS ÿ ÿ sk
ÿ y ÿÿ kk
the
=1 k=4
The shape functions Ni and Pk are expressed by
N1=ÿ N2=ÿ N3=ÿ
P4=4ÿÿ P5=4ÿÿ P6=4ÿÿ
with ÿ=1-ÿ-ÿ
while Ck and Sk are the direct cosines of the k-th side.
ÿxi, ÿyi are the nodal values of the rotations in the vertex nodes while ÿÿsk represents the increase of
tangential rotation at the midpoint of the k-th side
The curvatures will be expressed by
ÿ = Bb ÿ A + Bbÿÿ ÿ ÿ n
Where
ÿ0
ÿ
y 32 0 0 ÿ
y 31 00 ÿ
y 21 0 ÿ
1 ÿ
Bb =
ÿ
0 0 x 32 00 x 13 0 0 x 21
ÿ
2 TO And
ÿ ÿ
0 x 32 ÿ
y 32 0 x 13 ÿ
y 31 0 x 21 ÿ
y 21 ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ( P ky,ÿP y13C + ÿ
ÿ
k ,ÿ 21 ) k
1
B bÿ = =
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ( D kx,ÿD x13S+ k ,ÿ 21 ) k for k 4,5,6

2 TO And
ÿ ÿ
+ ÿ
+
ÿ ( P kx,ÿP x13CP y Pk ,ÿy S 21 ) k ( k ,ÿ k ,ÿ 21 ) kÿ
ÿ ÿ
13
A = ÿw1 ÿ x1 ÿ y1 w2 ÿ x2 ÿ y2 w3 ÿ x3 ÿ y3ÿ
ÿ ÿ n = ÿÿ ÿ s4 ÿÿ s5
ÿ ÿ s6 ÿ
Ae area of the element
Shear deformation field (assumed
shear strains)

196
Ck=cos k=xji/Lk
Sk=sin k=yji/Lk
Lk=rad(xji2+yji2)
xji=xj-xi
yji=yj-yi
Considering the local coordinate system sn (see figure) the constitutive equations for the
shear deformation along the k-th side can be expressed as
Ts
ÿ =
sz
D s
Having indicated with Ts the tangential force along the k-th side.
Along each side the equilibrium equations are written as:
Ts = Ms,s + Mns,n
Where
MDs = b ( ÿ ss, + ÿÿ no, )

1 ÿ
ÿ
MDour = b ( ÿ left, + ÿ our, )
2
Using the previous expressions you can get the following expression
D b ÿ 1 ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ = ÿ + ÿÿ + (ÿ + ÿ )
sz ÿ
yes, yes n,ns s, nn n,ns ÿ
D s ÿ 2 ÿ
Assuming along the generic k-th side a linear variation for the rotation ÿn and a variation
quadratic for the rotation ÿs
ÿ s ÿ s
ÿ n
=ÿ
1 ÿ no ÿ
L k ÿ+ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
nj
ÿ
ÿ Lk
ÿ s ÿ s s ÿ s ÿ
ÿ s
=ÿ
ÿ 1 ÿ
ÿ Yes
+ ÿ sj
+ 4 ÿ 1 ÿ
ÿ sk
ÿ
ÿ Lk ÿ ÿ
Lk Lk ÿ ÿ
L k ÿÿÿ ÿ
we obtain
D b 2
= = ÿ ÿ 3 ÿ k skÿ
ÿ szk ÿ ,
yes ss
D s
with
2
D b 12 2 h
= =
ÿ k 2 2
DLsk
k (1 ÿ ) Lk
ÿ
The components of the shear deformation of the sides k and m can be expressed as a function of
shear deformations in the vertices
ÿ
ÿ szk ÿ
ÿ CSk k ÿÿÿ
ÿ
ÿ xzi ÿ
=
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
CSm
ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ szm ÿ ÿÿ
ÿÿ m ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ yzi ÿ ÿÿ
and reversing
ÿ
ÿ xzi ÿ
1 ÿ Sm ÿ
S k ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ szk ÿ
=
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
TO
ÿ
CCm k
ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ yzi ÿ ÿÿ
the
ÿÿ
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ szm ÿ ÿÿ
= CSCS ÿ
Ai con km mk
i=1 k=4 m=6
i=2 k=5 m=4
i=3 k=6 m=5
It is therefore possible to obtain the expressions of the nodal shear deformations as functions of
tangential shear deformations of the sides
198
ÿÿ
ÿ xz 1
ÿÿ
ÿ/ SA ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
6 1 0 ÿ
SA4 / 1 ÿÿ
ÿ
ÿ
CA6 / 1 0 CA4 / 1
1 yz
ÿÿÿÿ
ÿ 4 sz
ÿ
ÿ 2xz
ÿ
5 /
SASA 2 4 / 2 0 ÿÿÿ
=
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ sz 5 ÿ
ÿ 5
/ 2
CACA ÿ
4 / 2 0
2 yz ÿÿÿ
ÿ sz 6
ÿ xz 3
0 ÿ
6 /
SASA 3 5
/ 3
ÿÿÿ
ÿ ÿÿÿ
0 CA6 / 3
ÿ
CA5 / 3
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
3 yz ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
Where
A1=C4S6-C6S4 A2=C5S4-C4S5 A3=C6S5-C5S6.
The shear deformation on the element is interpolated independently as a function of the values
nodal
3
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ xzi
ÿ
= =
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ xz
ÿ Nÿ the ÿ ÿ
ÿÿ xz
ÿ=1 the
ÿ yzi
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ
where Ni are the linear shape functions of the 3-node element.
Combining the previous expressions we obtain
ÿ ÿ
= ÿ =
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ
xz No
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿnÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ ÿ xz ÿ
Where
ÿÿ Sÿ
6 S5 ÿ ÿ S
4 S6 ÿ ÿ S
5 S4 ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿÿÿ
ÿÿ
Aÿ
1 TO
2 A2 TO
3
A3 TO
1
No = ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿ
ÿ
ÿÿ Cÿ
5
C6 ÿ ÿ Cÿ
6 C4 ÿ ÿ Cÿ
4 C5 ÿÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿÿ
A2 TO
1 TO
3
TO
2 TO
1 TO
3
ÿ
ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ
ÿ sz 4
ÿ
=
ÿ n ÿ ÿ 5 sz ÿ
ÿÿÿ
ÿ sz 6
ÿÿÿ
In the DKMT element the vector ÿn is expressed as a function of the variables ÿÿsk using the equations
constitutive and the equilibrium equations along the sides of the element obtaining the expression for ÿ
ÿÿ ÿ
xz
= = B
ÿ ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ sÿ ÿ ÿÿ n ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ yz ÿÿ
with
ÿÿ S5 S6 ÿ ÿ S6 S4 ÿ ÿ S4 S5 ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿÿ 4 ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿÿ ÿ
5
ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
6 ÿ
2
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
TO TO TO TO TO TO
= ÿ 2 1 ÿ ÿ 3 2 ÿ ÿ 1 3 ÿ
ÿ
B sÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
3 ÿ
ÿC 6 C5 ÿ ÿ C4 C 6 ÿ ÿC 5
C4 ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿÿ 4 ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ5
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿÿ ÿ
6 ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
TO TO TO TO TO TO
ÿÿ
ÿ 1 2 ÿ ÿ 2 3 ÿ ÿ 3 1 ÿ ÿ
ÿ
By applying the modified Hu-Washizu functional we obtain constraint equations on the three sides
of the element expressed by the following relations

Lk
ÿ Ts ÿ ÿ
ÿ ds = 0k 4,5,6 = ÿ = +w ÿ
ÿ ( sz sz ) sz ,s s
0
Which are discreetly brought to

Lk
ÿ
ds = 0
ÿ (ÿ sz ÿ sz )
0
ÿÿ s ÿ ÿ CSk k ÿ ÿÿ x ÿ
=
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ nijÿ ÿ
ÿ
SC
k k ÿ ÿÿ y ÿ
, ij,
So
L k L k 2
= 0
ÿ + wwji
( CSk ÿxi +
k yi ÿ )+ ( C k ÿxj + kSyj ÿ )+ L k (1 + ÿ k )ÿ ÿ sk
2 2 3
with
i=1 j=2 k=4
i=2 j=3 k=5
i=3 j=1 k=6
By applying this last relationship along the 3 sides the (hierarchical) variables ÿÿsk can be expressed
via the nodal displacement vector Un.
ÿ
ÿ =ÿ n ÿ ÿ
AUn ÿÿ n ÿ
with
ÿ1
AAA =
ÿ nÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ wÿ
And
ÿ L 4 (1 + ÿ 4 ) 0 0 ÿ
2
= ÿ
L
ÿ
TO
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
0 5 (1 + ÿ 5 ) 0
3 ÿ ÿ
0 0 L 6 (1
+ÿ 6)ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ

200
ÿ
ÿ
x 21 ÿ
y 21
ÿ
x 21 ÿ
y 21 ÿ
1 ÿ
1 0 0 0
ÿ
2 2 2 2 ÿ
x 32 x 32
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
= y 32 y 32
Aw
ÿÿ
ÿ 0 0 0 1 ÿ
1 ÿ
ÿ
2 2 2 2 ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
x 13 ÿ
y 13
ÿ
x 13 ÿ
y 13 ÿ
1 0 0 0 1
ÿ
ÿ 2 2 2 2 ÿ
Substituting the expression for ÿÿn into the expression for the curvatures ÿ we obtain
= BU
ÿÿÿ ÿ b ÿÿ nÿ
Where
BBBA=
ÿ bÿ ÿ bÿ ÿ+ÿ b ÿÿ ÿÿ nÿ
Substituting the expression for ÿÿn into the expression for the deformability cut ÿ is obtained
= BU
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ s ÿÿ ÿ n
Where
= BA
ÿÿ Bs ÿ sÿ ÿ ÿÿ nÿ
Once the matrices Bb and Bs are known, it is possible to obtain the stiffness matrix of the element
T T
KBHB= dA KBHB= dA
b ÿ b bb s
ÿ s s s
TO TO
And And
KKK= + b s
Once the system has been solved and the nodal displacements Un have been obtained, it is possible to obtain the moments and cuts
using the following expressions
ÿ M x ÿ
= = HB
ÿ ÿ
ÿM ÿ ÿ M
y ÿ ÿ b ÿÿ b (ÿ, ÿ
) ÿÿUÿ n
ÿ
M ÿ
ÿ xy ÿ
ÿ Tx ÿ
= = HB
ÿTÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ s ÿÿ s (ÿ, ÿ) ÿÿUnÿ
T
ÿ y ÿ
The development of the DKMQ quadrilateral element follows the scheme of the DKMT element. For adults
details see bibliography.

22 The beam element
The API++ solver implements the 2-node spatial beam element with 12 overall degrees of freedom.
In fact, for each node we have 6 movement components:
translations u, v, w according to the directions of the X, Y, Z axes
rotations ÿx, ÿy, ÿz around the XY Z axes.
The transverse displacements of the longitudinal axis of the beam are therefore represented by v and w.
The deformation characteristics of the element are:
ÿ axial deformation (local x axis) ÿx
ÿ curvature around the local y(flexural) axis ÿ y
ÿ curvature around the local z(flexural) axis ÿ z
ÿ curvature around the local x(torsional) axis ÿ x
ÿu ÿÿ x ÿÿ y ÿÿ z
ÿ x = ÿ =x ÿ= ÿ =z
y [TO]
ÿx ÿx ÿx ÿx
In API++ it is possible to use both the Bernoulli-Euler beam element (without shear deformability)
than the Timoshenko beam element (with shear deformability).
In both theories the cross section of the beam remains flat after deformation; but
while in the Bernoulli beam it remains orthogonal to the axis of the beam even during deformation

202
occurred in the Timoshenko beam, this orthogonality is lost due to angular sliding
related to cutting.
As is known, in the Bernoulli beam the rotations ÿ are not independent variables but are derived
as the derivative of the transverse displacement w
ÿw ÿv
ÿ =ÿ
ÿ =
y z
ÿx ÿx [B]
where x is the abscissa along the axis of the beam. In the Timoshenko beam, however, the rotations are variable
independent but linked to the transversal displacement by the following relationship
ÿw ÿv
+ =ÿ ÿ =
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
y z z y
ÿx ÿx [C]
where ÿy and ÿz represent the angular slip (shear deformability) in the y and z directions
local.
The relations [C] degenerate into the relations [B] when the shear deformabilities are negligible (ÿy =
ÿz ÿ 0) which happens for slender beams (span/section height ratio > 5).
For the Bernoulli beam, therefore, the expression of the curvatures as functions of the A and B is obtained
transversal displacements of the axis line:

2 2
ÿ w ÿ v
ÿ=ÿ ÿ =z
y 2 2
ÿx ÿx
The stress-strain relationships are instead the following:
ÿ Axial stress N = EAÿx
ÿ Torque Mt = GJtXx
ÿ Bending moment around y axis My = EIyXy
ÿ Bending moment around z axis Mz = EIzXz
Where the symbols take on the following meanings:
ÿ E elastic modulus of the material constituting the beam (Young's modulus)
ÿ G tangential elastic modulus of the material constituting the beam G=E/2(1+ÿ)
ÿ Iy and Iz moments of inertia of the cross section of the beam around the local x and y axes,
ÿ A cross-sectional area
ÿ Jt is the polar moment of inertia of the cross section
For the Timoshenko beam the following relations apply for the Ty and Tz cuts
Ty = GA ÿy/ky
Tz = GA ÿz/kz
where ky and kz are the shear factors of the section (5/6 for the rectangular section).
In the Bernoulli beam the cuts are obtained from the associated moments using equilibrium equations.
22.1 Stiffness matrix - Bernoulli beam
Degrees of freedom of the beam element (local system)
For the Bernoulli beam, cubic interpolation functions are assumed for the displacements
(Hermite interpolation) transversal v, w.
We indicate with u1, v1, w1, ÿ1x, ÿ1y, ÿ1z the nodal displacements corresponding to the first node of the
beam (local system) and with u2, v2, w2, ÿ2x, ÿ2y, ÿ2z the displacements corresponding to the second
beam node.
Assuming an isoparametric coordinate system with origin at the midpoint of the beam element
(The element length, x2 and x1 local abscissae of the extreme nodes)
ÿ = (x2-x1)/Le/2 -1 Oÿ O1
The shape functions of the displacement w can be written as

204
1 3
Now 1 = (2 3ÿ 4
+ ÿÿ )
1 3
Now 2 = + ÿ (2 3 ÿ ÿ )
4
L 3
Noÿ 1 =
And
(1 2 ÿÿÿ + ÿ ÿ )
8
L And 2 3
Noÿ 2 = ÿ ÿ + +( 1 ÿÿ ÿ )
8
Where Nw are the shape functions relating to the nodal displacements and Nÿ are the shape functions
relating to nodal rotations.
The transversal displacement w to the generic abscissa ÿ will therefore be expressed by
w(ÿ) = Nw1w1+Nw2w2+Nÿ1ÿ y1+Nÿ2ÿ y2
We have a similar expression for the transversal displacement v (except for some signs on the
functions Nÿ)
v(ÿ) = Nv1v1+Nv2v2+Nÿ1ÿ z1+Nÿ2ÿ z2
The rotations at the generic abscissa ÿ are obtained by derivation of the functions v(ÿ) and w(ÿ) and from these
for further derivations the curvatures are obtained. Therefore the rotations are quadratic functions of
ÿ and the curvatures are linear functions of ÿ.
Axial displacements and rotation around the x axis are interpolated as a function of the nodal values
using linear functions of the variable ÿ.
u(ÿ)=1/2(1-ÿ) uÿ+1/2(1+ÿ) u2
ÿx(ÿ)=1/2(1-ÿ) ÿxÿ+1/2(1+ÿ) ÿx2
Once the interpolation functions of the displacements are known, the relations between them are obtained by derivation
the deformations at nodal displacements (matrix B). The elastic matrix of the section is defined
ÿ IT'S AT 00 ÿ
D = 0 0
ÿ ÿ
Hey
ÿ ÿ
EIz
ÿ 0
ÿ 0 ÿ
ÿ
The stiffness matrix is obtained from the following integration

T
KE BÿDBdV
=
V
Where V represents the volume of the element (V=A*Le).
The stiffness matrix of the Bernoulli element is shown below

For convenience, we report the nodal displacements of the element related to the Ke matrix
u1, v1, w1, ÿx1, ÿy1, ÿz1 u2, v2, w2, ÿx2, ÿy2, ÿz2
The corresponding vector of nodal loads, equivalent to a uniformly distributed load q, is

constructed using the following integration:
eg Nqdx
ÿ=
The
Having indicated with N the vector containing the shape functions of the element's displacements.
Once the stiffness matrix and the nodal load vector of the single element have been determined, these
they must be assembled in the global matrix KG and in the global nodal loads vector p. Therefore let it be the
matrix Ke and vector pe must be reported in the global reference system.
The rotation matrix T (12x12) is defined by the following expression:
ÿÿ ÿ000ÿ0
0
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ0
T = ÿ
0ÿÿ0 ÿ
ÿÿ
0ÿÿ000

206
Since ÿ is the matrix obtained from the product of the directing cosines of the local and global axes
' ' '
ÿÿ eeee
1 1 1 2 ee1 3 ÿÿ
' ' '

ÿ= eeeeee
2 1 2 2 2 3
' ' '
ee3 1 eeee 3 2 3 3
ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ
and the 0 terms of the matrix T represent zero submatrices of order 3x3.
Therefore the stiffness matrix and the load vector in the global system will be expressed as
T
KTKT= AND And
T
=
pTp AND And
Through the assembly process extended to all the elements of the model, the
global stiffness matrix of the KG system and the nodal load vector p.
The resolution of the system where u is the vector of all nodal displacements
=
K up G
It provides the solution in terms of nodal displacements.
22.2 The elements used in the API++ program
Plate elements and plate elements are implemented in the API++ program.
The slab elements implemented are:
ÿ triangular element with 3 CST nodes (constant strain element)
ÿ triangular element with 6 nodes LST (linear deformation element)
ÿ quadrangular element with 4 nodes (Q4)
ÿ quadrangular element with 8 nodes (Q8)
ÿ beam element
The implemented plate elements are triangular and quadrangular elements with and without deformability
cutting. In particular, the following elements are implemented:
ÿ DKT element (Discrete Kirchoff Triangle) ÿ DKQ element
(Discrete Kirchoff Quadrilateral) ÿ DKMT element (Discrete Kirchhoff-
Mindlin Triangle with shear deformability) ÿ DKMQ element (Discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin Quadrilateral with shear
deformability)
When you set the “Triangular elements” option in mesh generation, API++ will use i
following elements:
ÿ DKT element (plate) + CST element (plate) if shear deformability has not been set
ÿ DKMT element (plate) + CST element (plate) if shear deformability has been set
However, if you have set the “Quadrangular Elements” option, the following elements will be used:
ÿ element DKQ (plate) + element Q4 (plate) if shear deformability has not been set
ÿ DKMQ element (plate) + Q4 element (plate) if shear deformability has been set
In this second case (quadrangular elements) it may be that the mesh generator has generated both quadrangular and triangular
elements then API++ uses coupled plate elements of the same
family: DKT+DKQ or DKMT+DKMQ.
The higher-order plate elements LST and Q8 can only be used for plate-type analysis
not having corresponding overlapping plate elements.

208
23 Mesh Generation
In the finite element analysis of a structure the continuum is discretized into elements of various shapes
connected to each other at the nodes. In the analysis of two-dimensional structures such as plates and slabs, the elements
usually have a triangular and/or quadrangular shape. Items may have
only vertex nodes or vertex and edge nodes; the latter are usually positioned in the middle of the
sides.
The procedure for dividing the continuum into elements is called mesh generation and represents the first step for the finite
element analysis of any structure.
In the literature there are several methods for generating a mesh of elements on a region of
any shape.
The most well-known method is certainly based on the Delaunay triangulation technique which allows you to obtain meshes of
triangular elements. With this method the mesh obtained is optimized in the sense that
among all the possible triangulations, the Delaunay one minimizes the maximum angle and maximizes the
minimum angle thus generating elements that have the lowest distortion ratio.
The best-known method for generating meshes of quadrangular elements is based on the technique defined as the advancing
front method.
Several methods have recently been developed in the generation of meshes of quadrangular elements (i
so-called indirect methods) which generate a mesh of quadrangular elements starting from a mesh of
triangular elements.
A further methodology for generating quadrangular meshes consists in the decomposition of the
original polygon into simpler polygons and then adopt one on each of the polygons thus obtained
known techniques (for example advancing front).
There are several mesh generators available in the API++ program which will be described below.
Remember that the mesh generator must take into account all the geometry of the structure; therefore
nodes will be inserted in correspondence with concentrated loads, constraints, poles and pillars; they will have to
zones having equal properties such as thicknesses and constant subgrade must be precisely delimited
and distributed loads; and nodes must be inserted along the beams, load lines, constraint lines.
It is therefore necessary to pay attention when entering all these properties so as not to create errors
conditions of excessive complexity. In this case the generator may not be able to
generate the mesh or it could generate it but in a non-optimal way.
We will describe below the mesh generators present in the API++ program
23.1 Structured triangular mesh generator
The generated mesh will be made up of triangular, quadrangular elements or both. If you have chosen a
triangular shaped element (FEM Analysis Options) the mesh will be made up of triangular elements.
If, on the other hand, a quadrangular element has been selected, the mesh will be made up of elements
quadrangular or by quadrangular and triangular elements (especially near the edges of the
region). The mesh is generated on an orthogonal mesh of points therefore the rectangular elements
they will generally be very regular except in the edge areas.
This type of generator gives good results (such as quality of elements) on regions of regular shapes and
irregular, even multi-connected.

210
23.2 Unstructured triangular mesh generator

The difference compared to the previous generator
consists in the fact that the nodes of the mesh come
generated not on a mesh established a priori but
following a triangle optimization criterion.
Fixed a series of notable points (for example the vertices
of the polygon, the constraint points, etc.) the method tries to
create a mesh made up of more regular triangles
possible (equilateral). The notable advantage of this
method consists in the possibility of establishing zones of
thickening of the elements.
In fact, the desired size for the element is fixed
it is possible to define an element reduction factor
at:
• Constraints
• Poles
• Concentrated loads
• Points of concavity
• Internal polygons (in the case of multi-connected regions)
• Along the axis of the beams (ribs of a ribbed foundation)
The size of the De element is given by De = min (DimX/NX, DimY/NY)

Where DimX and DimY represent the maximum dimensions of the polygon in the X and Y direction and NX ed
NY are the number of elements desired in both directions (defined by the User).
Therefore, if at a fixed point (for example a constraint) you set a factor of
reduction equal to 0.5 the elements generated around this point will have a size approximately equal to
0.5xDe. In intermediate zones, elements will be generated with dimensions varying linearly between the two
set values.
The unstructured mesh generator provides excellent results for irregular geometries with concavities and
internal polygons and in many cases represents the only usable tool.
If a quadrangular shaped element has been set, the generator can still be
used even if the generated elements present strong distortions in some cases.
23.3 Classic mesh generator
It was designed for regular geometries and quadrangular elements. Does not mesh multi-connected regions. It can only be used
for simple geometries. In the presence of oblique sides they come
generated on the contour of triangular elements. Elements are generated on a mesh grid
rectangular.

212
23.4 Polygon mesh generator

It is suitable for generating the mesh on polygons that are not excessively complex. Generates only
quadrangular elements. The technique used is that of decomposition into subpolygons.
When it converges it provides good quality and not excessively distorted meshes.

214
24 Modeling the foundation plate
We have seen which plate-plate elements are used in API++. We will describe in this chapter the
soil modeling for the foundation plate.
The ground is modeled with a series of non-traction Winkler springs. The latter
this aspect is fundamental in order to take into account any overturning phenomena. In any case
not eliminating the tension springs would result in distorted results both in terms of displacement and
stresses. Once the mesh has been generated, the modeler places the
model a vertical spring that opposes the vertical movements of the audience and a spring
horizontal which opposes horizontal movements (sliding on the laying surface).
Naturally it is not necessary to define constraints that oppose the horizontal translation since
the constraints are provided, more correctly, by the horizontal springs spread at the foundation interface
ground.
The stiffness of the vertical spring is proportional to the background constant defined by the User in
point considered and its area of competence:
k mw
= k Ac
The area of competence depends on the mesh generated and the shape of the element used (triangular or
quadrangular).
For the horizontal spring, a stiffness equal to a portion of the vertical spring correlated to the soil-foundation
friction angle is assumed.
The vertical and horizontal stiffnesses of the springs are then assembled into the stiffness matrix
global system at the appropriate degrees of freedom.
The elimination of tension springs involves an iterative calculation of the resulting solution
appropriately carried out by the program until all possible tension springs have been removed
eliminate. Based on some convergence meters the program decides whether to proceed
possibly to a reassembly of the system's stiffness matrix.
Recall that the traditional Winkler model is an extremely simple and fast model that
However, it fails to fully capture some typical behaviors of a foundation. The most example
simple concerns the case of a foundation loaded with a uniform distributed load. The model at
Winkler returns a uniform displacement (equal to w=p/k) for the entire plate to which they correspond
zero stresses (moments and shears). This result is clearly incorrect because even with loads
uniformly distributed the plate tends to bend more at the center
resulting in it being subject to moments and cuts.
What has been said is valid if you decide to proceed with a traditional Winkler analysis.
24.1 The interaction model
API++ allows you to calculate a foundation slab using the interaction model
which allows you to calculate the interaction between the bed and the ground more correctly using i
deformability parameters of the soil itself (edometer modulus, elastic modulus, slopes of the
oedometric curve). The implemented method is a variant of the Koenig and Sherif method known in
literature.
If a load is applied to the surface of the installation surface, this load influences the failure of any
foundation point. Indicating with wi the failure at point i (of the laying surface)
we can say that:
wi P /r
=ÿ j ij
j
Where Pj is the generic load at node j and rij is a coefficient (stiffness) that relates the
load at j with settlement at i. This coefficient depends on the distance between node i and node j beyond
than by the mechanical parameters of the soil

In matrix terms we can express the previous relation as:
w = Fp
Having indicated with w the vector of ground settlements at any point of the foundation, p il
vector of the loads acting on it and with F the flexibility matrix. We must also impose the
congruence between the ground settlements at a generic point Q(x,y) and the plate displacements.
The overall stiffness matrix of the system will be given by the sum of the stiffness matrix of the
plate KP and from the soil stiffness matrix KT obtained by inversion of the matrix
flexibility F
KG=KP+KT
with
-1
KT=F
therefore, if the vector of nodal loads, p, acting on the slab is known, it is possible to derive the solution in terms
of movements through the

ÿ1
=
uKpG
Once the displacements are known, it is possible to obtain the stresses in the structural elements.
In the interaction model the background constant turns out to be not a data point of the problem but a
result of the analysis. In fact, once the system has been solved, the displacements and pressures at each point of the foundation
plate are known, the subgrade constant can be determined as the ratio between
pressure q and displacement w
k(x,y)=q(x,y)/w(x,y)

216
From a computational point of view, the procedure described above is very expensive as the
flexibility matrix F and its inverse (KT) are full (non-banded) matrices and therefore
they destroy the banded nature of the structural matrix by requiring machine memory commitment
very high and significantly longer calculation times.
To overcome these obstacles, Aztec Informatica has developed an ad hoc solver that manages to
solve the aforementioned system in extremely rapid and certainly acceptable times for the designer.
Below is the example of a square plate subjected to a uniform load

distributed to highlight the differences between the traditional Winkler model and the
interaction developed in API++.
The first model (Winkler) returns, as previously mentioned, a uniform diagram of the
displacements (and pressures) while the second (interaction model) returns a deformed one
characterized by a maximum at the center. The stresses in the first case are zero
while in the second case we have moments at the center Mx=My=26158 Kgm/m.
Winkler model displacements
Q=10000.0 Kg/m2
S=50 cm
The pressure diagram is

identical to that of the
displacements (q=kw)
Interaction model shifts
Q=10000.0 Kg/m2
S=50 cm
Pressure diagram
contact.
(interaction model)
The pressures are not uniform
but they have higher values
at the edges and
more uniform trend towards

center.
In any case, the trend of
pressures is influenced by
thickness from the plate
contrary to what happens

in the Winkler model
Another far from negligible advantage of the interaction model is its ability to
consider the influence of the stratigraphy on the settlements of the slab (assigning its own values to each layer
deformability characteristics). Winkler's model is absolutely incapable of taking into account the
variability of the layers arranged under the foundation. Furthermore, the model holds up, albeit approximately
account of the inclination of the layers placed under the laying surface.
In the interaction model, foundations close to each other influence each other because of tensions
induced by the first also influence the failure of the second and vice versa.
For example, let's consider two plinths A and B placed at a certain distance and we load only plinth A.
In the Winkler model, plinth B does not fail because it is unloaded. In the interaction model
plinth B will however suffer failures caused by the tensions induced underground by plinth A.

218
As the distance increases, this effect disappears, as is reasonable to expect.
In the interaction model it is necessary to calculate stresses and settlements within the half-space. In API++ you can use one of the
following methods to calculate voltages:
ÿ Boussinesq
ÿ Westergaad
ÿ Frohlich
While for the calculation of settlements you can use:
ÿ Linear oedometric method; Eed = constant for the layer considered independent of the state
tensional
ÿ Non-linear oedometric method; the deformability of the soil for each layer is defined by
• the compression ratio (CR=Cc/(1+e0)),
• the recompression ratio (RR=Cr/(1+e0))
• the degree of overconsolidation (OCR).
The deformability in the generic point depends on the stress state in the point itself as well as on the
tensional history.
ÿ Elastic method (the deformability parameters are E and ÿ)

25 Calculation of voltages
The determination of the state of tension induced in the ground by a load applied to the surface is performed with the hypothesis
of a continuous, linear-elastic, homogeneous and isotropic medium.
The influence of the hypotheses underlying the various formulas used to determine the stresses
induced, has been investigated and it can be assumed that in the majority of practical cases, vertical tensions
induced can be estimated with the Boussinesq theory with a reliability of 20%.
The voltages calculated with the various methods listed are to be understood as total voltages. In light of
principle of effective strains, effective strains can be determined if one is able to
establish the value of the overpressure of the interstitial water produced by their application
loads.
25.1 Boussinesq theory
In the Boussinesq solution the tensions induced in the subsoil due to the effect of a concentrated load P
placed on the boundary of the half-space, are expressed by the following relations:
ÿ P represents the vertical load applied on the surface of the ground level (coordinate 0,0,0)
ÿ z ordinate of the point where you want to calculate the voltage induced by the load
ÿ r distance (on the horizontal plane) between the application point of P and the calculation point
ÿ R is the Cartesian distance between the point between the application point of P and the calculation point
ÿ ÿ is the Poisson's ratio of the soil

220
In the case of a load distributed on a line or on a polygonal footprint it is possible to integrate
these expressions to obtain the influence of the load at the desired half-space point.
25.2 Frohlich theory
Frohlich's theory evaluates the increase in tension in the subsurface, abandoning the module hypothesis
E = const. with the depth z. In 1936, following experimental tests on inconsistent terrain, he provided the expressions for the
tensions induced in half-space by a load in spherical polar coordinates.
concentrated P. In the expressions, to take into account the real propagation effects a appears
arbitrary exponent ÿ, called Concentration Factor, which generally takes values from 2 to 6.
The vertical tension in a generic point of the half-space takes on the expression
ÿ +2
vP so ÿ
qv
= so
ÿ
ÿ =ÿ P
2 2
2ÿ r 2ÿ z
Where
ÿ z the height of the voltage evaluation point
ÿ P the magnitude of the concentrated load
ÿ ÿ the concentration factor
ÿ r distance between the evaluation point and the load point
ÿ cos ÿ = z / r; ÿ angle on the vertical)
25.3 Westergaard theory

The Westergaard equation (1938), unlike that of Boussinesq, contains the coefficient of
Poisson. The Cartesian triple is assumed to be the one originating at the load point and the point at which one wishes to know the
induced voltage is indicated with P (x, y, z). The increase in vertical tension
due to a point load Q can be written as:
Q to
qv = 2
ÿ
2
2 ÿz (ar/z+ ( ))3/2
Where:
ÿ Q, is the intensity of the point load;
ÿ z, is the height of point P;
ÿ r, is the distance between the intersection point of the vertical for the load point and the horizontal plane a
z coordinate passing through P and the point P;
ÿ
a = (1- 2)/(2-ÿ 2) ÿ
ÿ Poisson's ratio
222
26 Calculation of settlements
Foundation settlements take on a certain importance linked to the relevance of the work to be carried out
realize. There are several methods existing in the literature for calculating settlements.
An observation to make on the calculation of settlements is that the value that is determined with
whatever method is applied, it is to be understood only as the best estimate of the deformations suffered by the
terrain to be expected when applying loads.
The settlement, meaning that in the vertical direction, is made up of different components, made up of rolling
movements and relative sliding between the granules, which causes the
the void index, and by the breaking of the granules which modifies the structure of the material. Only one
a very small fraction of the failure is elastic in nature, recovered if the load is removed.
Even if the elastic fraction is very small, the soil, in the settlement calculation, is treated as
pseudoelastic material characterized by the parameters Es, G', ÿ and ks. Experience has shown that
such a hypothesis allows us to obtain more than satisfactory settlement values.
In general, failures are classified as:

ÿ immediate, i.e. those that develop as soon as the overload is applied;
ÿ consolidation, i.e. those that develop over time and require a period of the order of
months or years to run out.
Immediate settlement analysis is performed for all fine-grained soils with degree of saturation
< 90% and for coarse-grained ones with a high permeability coefficient.
Consolidation settlement analysis is used for all saturated or nearly saturated fine-grained soils.
Please remember that the consolidation process represents the gradual expulsion of water from the area
affected by induced overpressures (tension bulb), i.e. the gradual dissipation of
neutral overpressures, the increase in effective tensions and the decrease in soil porosity.
26.1 Oedometric method

The oedometric method in calculating settlements is approached in the literature with two methods, the
the first linked to the oedometric module, the second linked to the oedometric curve.
The method based on the oedometric module is implemented following the following expression:
n
ÿ ÿ
ÿ =H the
ÿ z the
ÿ=
i1 AND
and of
Where:
ÿ ÿÿ is the tension induced in the soil, at depth z, by the contact pressure of the foundation;
ÿ Eed is the elastic modulus determined through the oedometric test and relating to the i-th layer;
ÿ ÿz represents the thickness of the i-th layer into which the compressible layer has been divided and per
whose elastic modulus is known.
The method based on the oedometric curve (non-linear oedometric method), is implemented
following the following expression:
' '
ÿ ÿ ÿ +ÿ ÿ ÿ
p v0 v
ÿ HH
= RR log
0 ÿ
ÿ ' + CR log ' ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ v0 p ÿ
ÿ
Where:
ÿ H0 represents the thickness of the layer before applying the load;

ÿ RR represents the recompression ratio;
ÿ CR represents the compression ratio;
ÿ ÿ'p = OCR ÿ'vo represents the pre-consolidation pressure;
ÿ ÿ'vo represents the geostatic pressure in the center of the layer;
ÿ OCR represents the degree of pre-consolidation;

ÿ ÿÿv represents the increase in tension in the center of the layer due to the applied load.
If the applied voltage increase is such that the pre-consolidation pressure is not exceeded
( ÿ'vo + ÿÿv < ÿ'p ) the expression for calculating the settlement becomes:
'
ÿ +ÿ ÿ
v0 v
ÿ=
HH RR log '
0
ÿ
v0
If, however, the soil is normally consolidated ( ÿ'vo = ÿ'p ) the expression for calculating the settlement
becomes:
'
ÿ +ÿ ÿ
v0 v
ÿ=
HH CR log
0 ' .
ÿ
v0
The compressible layer can be set by the User, if known (knowledge of the depth of the
rigid bedrock layer), or you can have the program calculate it.

224
The oedometric method is the classic procedure for calculating settlements in fine-grained soils,
proposed by Terzaghi.
Please remember that the oedometric hypothesis is verified with a better approximation the smaller it is
the value of the ratio between the thickness of the compressible layer and the plan size of the
foundation.
However, the method has excellent approximation even in the cases of deformable layers
great thickness.
26.2 Elastic Method
In the hypothesis that the ground can be assimilated to an elastic medium, the failure of can be obtained
a point on the surface by integrating the vertical deformation. The expression for calculating the
failure (w1) is as follows:
n
ÿ ÿ
w1 = ÿ z
the
the
ÿ=
i1 AND
the
Where
ÿ ÿÿ is the tension induced in the soil, at depth z, by the contact pressure of the foundation;
ÿ E is the elastic modulus of the soil constituting the i-th layer;
ÿ ÿz represents the thickness of the i-th layer into which the compressible layer has been divided and per
whose elastic modulus is known.
27 Limit load of shallow foundations
The foundation soil of any structure must be able to withstand the load placed on it
transmitted by the structures above, without breaking or collapsing
structure are excessive. In this section the problem of determining the
limit shear resistance (ultimate load or limit load) of a shallow foundation. They will come
proposed the solutions obtained by various authors (Terzaghi, Meyerhof, Hansen, Vesic, Cascone 2006)
.
All the proposed formulas have a trinomial form in which each term is linked to cohesion,
to the friction angle and specific weight. They differ in the introduction of corrective factors for
take into account the depth of the foundation, the eccentricity and inclination of the load, etc.
In writing the various formulas we will use the following symbolism:
ÿc cohesion
ÿ
ÿ approx adhesion along the base of the foundation (approx c)
ÿÿ friction angle
ÿÿ foundation soil friction angle
ÿÿ specific weight of the soil
ÿ Kp passive thrust coefficient expressed as Kp = tan2 (45° + ÿ/2)
ÿB width of the foundation
ÿL length of the foundation
ÿD depth of the foundation laying surface
ÿq lithostatic pressure at the laying surface of the foundation
ÿ qult ultimate load of the foundation
The ultimate load provided by the various formulas is a unit ultimate load (Force/Area Unit). The load
limit in foundation is therefore provided by the relation:
=
Q limit q B'
last L'
with B' B - = 2 And

B
The L=- 2 And

L
where B and L are the width and length of the foundation and eB, eL are the eccentricities of the
load along B and L respectively (Meyerhof).
In this regard, the program allows you to ignore the reduction in the size of the
foundation or to take it into account according to the Meyerhof criterion. These settings come
provided in the Analysis Options window by activating the relevant option.

According to Bowles the ultimate load is provided by the following relation:
qult = qult ReB ReL
226
where in the case of cohesive soils
And And
B L
R eB
= 1- 2 R 1-
eL 2
=
B L
and in the case of inconsistent soils.
And B And L
R eB =1 - R eL =1 -
B L
The coefficients described must be introduced only if 0 < eB/B < 0.3 and 0 < eL/L < 0.3.
According to the Meyerhof criterion, in the case of eccentric loading, in all the formulas used (term Nÿ and
correction coefficients) the small dimensions must be considered: B' = B - 2 eB and L' = L - 2 eL.
The Hansen and Vesic formulas give values of the ultimate load that are very similar to each other. It's up to you
however, it is up to the designer to choose the formula he deems most suitable based on personal experience. Different
However, the authors recommend Hansen 's formula which allows you to take into account all those factors
occur very often in the calculation of a shallow foundation (inclined and eccentric load,
inclined foundation, etc).
Among all the coefficients N present in the bearing capacity formulas, Nÿ is the one characterized by the widest
variability of values. This term does not make a significant contribution to qult, so it can
use any reasonable value.
These observations regarding the area of use of the are reported in the texts reported in the bibliography
bearing capacity formulas.
The Terzaghi formula can be used when there are markedly cohesive soils in the case of D/B <= 1 or for a quick
estimate of quantities to be compared with estimates otherwise obtained.
Hansen, Meyerhof, Vesic are applicable in most practical cases, and the choice of method
is influenced by the User's preference or familiarity with a particular formula.
Hansen, Vesic, Brinch-Hansen for inclined foundations, sloping or in the case D/B > 1.
Another relevant aspect is the presence of the aquifer. In the calculation of the bearing capacity, the effective volume
weight (ÿ' = ÿsat - ÿw) of the soil is considered and this appears both in the overload term
than in the term due to its own weight.

When the water table is below the failure wedge, its presence does not influence the calculation of the
bearing capacity and can be neglected.
When the water table level falls within the wedge, the calculation of the effective volume weight, from
using in terms of self-weight may be slightly more complex. In many cases such
term can be neglected obtaining a solution in favor of security, since its contribution
it is not substantial.
For the calculation of the bearing capacity carried out according to the instructions of the NTC 2008 – NTC 2018, the
soil parameters are reduced according to partial coefficients

The new regulations also require the sliding or sliding verification of the foundation by means of
the report below:
ÿ + EPd
Vsd FRd
where Vsd represents the horizontal calculation force,

ÿ ÿ
F cRdAN= ÿ + tan sd
is the frictional drag and EPd is the passive thrust.
27.1 Terzaghi method
Terzaghi proposed the following expression for calculating the bearing capacity of a foundation
superficial.
= + + 0.5
q last
cN s qN BN
ccs q ÿ ÿ ÿ
Where
2
750 ( . ÿÿ - ÿ / )2 tan ÿ
tan ÿ K ÿ
( And
) ÿ pÿ
N = Noÿ = ÿ
2
ÿ1 ÿ
Nc = (Nq -1) cot ÿ q 2

( 2 cos 45 2 + ÿ/ ) 2 cosÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
The form factors sc and sÿ, which appear in the expression of qult, depend on the form of the
foundation. In particular they are worth 1 for ribbon-shaped or elongated rectangular foundations, they are valid
1.3 and 0.8 respectively for square foundations and are respectively 1.3 and 0.6 for foundations
circular.
As regards the value of Nÿ, it depends on the factor Kpÿ which Terzaghi has not left
no analytical expression. Several authors recommend using Nÿ instead of the expression
provided by Terzaghi, expressions taken from other authors (Vesic, Spangler and Handy).
Terzaghi's formula is valid for superficial foundations with D ÿ B and does not take into account the possible
slope of the foundation and eccentricity and inclination of the load.
In the case of stratified soil the physical and mechanical parameters which are involved in the formula are
referring to an "equivalent macrolayer" with characteristics that are calculated by the program
according to the method set by the User in the Equivalent layer section of the Options window
analyses.
27.2 Meyerhof method
Meyerhof proposes the following expressions for calculating the bearing capacity:
Vertical load
= + + 0.5
q last
cN sd qN sd
cccB qqq ÿ N sd
ÿ ÿ ÿ
Inclined load
= + + 0.5
q last
cN id qN idccc
B qqq ÿ N id
ÿÿ ÿ

228
where dc, dq, dÿ, are the depth factors, sc, sq, sÿ, are the shape factors and ic, iq, iÿ, are the
load inclination.
The factors Nc, Nq, Nÿ are given by the following expressions:

ÿ ÿtan 2
=
Neither tan 45 2 ( ÿ )+ = 1 tan 14 N (N - ) ( .
Nc = (Nq -1)cotÿ q ÿ) ÿ q
Form factors
For ÿ = 0 B
=1 s =1
2 Kp =1+ 0. sc sq ÿ
L
For ÿ > 0 B B B
s
L 2 Kp =1+ 0. sc L 1 Kp =1+ 0. sq ÿ 1 Kp =1+ 0.
L
Depth factors
For ÿ = 0 D
dc = 1+ 0. d =1 d =1
2 Kp q ÿ
B
For ÿ > 0 D D D
dc = 1+ 0. d
2 Kp dq 1 Kp =1+ 0. ÿ 1 Kp =1+ 0.
B B B
Load inclination factors
or or
For ÿ = 0 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
the
c
=ÿ
ÿ1ÿ the
=ÿ
the =0
q ÿÿ1 ÿ
ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ 90 ÿ ÿ 90 ÿ
or or 2
For ÿ > 0 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
the
c
=ÿ
ÿ1ÿ the
q
=ÿ
the
=ÿ
1
ÿÿ1 ÿ
ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ 90 ÿ ÿ 90 ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ
In expressions of inclination factors, ÿ represents the angle that the line of action of the load
shape with the vertical.
The values of qult, which are obtained from the Meyerhof formula, are comparable to those obtained
via the Terzaghi formula for low values of the D/B ratio. The difference becomes more pronounced when the D/B ratio becomes
higher.
27.3 Hansen's method
Hansen's expressions for calculating the bearing capacity differ depending on whether one is at the
presence of a purely cohesive soil (ÿ = 0) or less and are expressed as follows:
General case
q last
= cN sdigbcccccc
+ qN sdigb + 0.5Bÿÿ digb
qqqqqq ÿÿÿÿÿ
Case of purely cohesive soil ÿ = 0
q last = 514 1+sdigb ) qc +

. c( c
ÿ
c
ÿ
c
ÿ
c
+
where dc, dq, dÿ, are depth factors, sc, sq, sÿ, are the shape factors, ic, iq, iÿ, are the
load inclination, bc, bq, bÿ, are the inclination factors of the laying surface and gc, gq, gÿ, are factors
which take into account the fact that the foundation rests on sloping ground.
The factors Nc, Nq, Nÿ are expressed as:

ÿ ÿtan 2
=
Neither tan 45(2 +ÿ
Nc = (Nq -1)cotÿ q ) Nÿ =1.5(Nq -1)tanÿ
Let us now see how the various factors that appear in the expression of the ultimate load are expressed.
Form factors
For ÿ = 0 B
--- ---
sc = 0.2
L
For ÿ > 0 No B B B
q
s c = 1+ tan ÿ s ÿ =1ÿ 0.4
1 sq = +
Noc L L L
Depth factors
For ÿ = 0 d c = 0.4k --- ---
2
For ÿ > 0 d c = 1+ 0.4 k d =1+ 2tan d =1
q ÿ ( 1ÿleft ÿ )k ÿ
The parameter k is defined as:

D D 1 D D
k = k = tan
ÿ
self ÿ1 self ÿ 1
B B B B
Let V and H indicate the load components perpendicular and parallel to the base e respectively
with Af the effective area of the foundation obtained as Af = B' x L' (B' and L' are related to the dimensions
effective of the foundation B, L and to the eccentricity of the load eB, eL from the relations B' = B - 2 andB L' = L - 2
eL) and with ÿ the inclination angle of the foundation expressed in degrees (ÿ = 0 for horizontal foundation).
The load inclination factors are expressed as:
For ÿ = 0
1ÿ H ÿ
the
=ÿÿ ÿ
1 1 ÿ
--- ---
c
2 ÿ
At c ÿ
ÿ does ÿ
5 5
For ÿ > 0 1 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ
=ÿ
the
q 0.5 H 0.7 H
the
c
the
q
=ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ =ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ
For ÿ = 0 No 1
the
q
the
ÿ
VA+c VA+c
ÿ
q
ÿ
cot ÿ ÿ ÿ
cot ÿ ÿ
ÿ does ÿ ÿ does ÿ

230
For ÿ > 0 5
ÿ ÿ ÿ
or
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
0.7 ÿ
H ÿ
For ÿ > 0
ÿ ÿ
5
1 ÿ
the
q
ÿ 0.5 H ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
450
ÿ
ÿ
the
c
=ÿ
the
q
the
=ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ the
=ÿ
1
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
No q ÿ
1 q ÿ
VA+ c cot ÿ ÿ
VA+c cot ÿ
ÿ does ÿ ÿ
does ÿ
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
Inclination factors of the foundation laying surface
For ÿ = 0 or
ÿ --- ---
bc =
147
For ÿ > 0 or
ÿ ÿ2 ÿ tan ÿ ÿ2.7 tan

ÿ ÿ
bc =ÿ
1 bq = e bÿ = e
147
Terrain inclination factors
Indicating the steepness of the slope with ÿ, the g factors are obtained from the following expressions:
For ÿ = 0
ÿ or
--- ---
gc =
147
For ÿ > 0 or
ÿ
gc =ÿ
1 ( gq = 1ÿ 0.5 tan ÿ )5 g ÿ = 1ÿ
( 0.5 tan ÿ )5
147
In order to apply the Hansen formula , the following conditions must be met:
H ÿV tan ÿ + A ago
c ÿ ÿ ÿ ii , ÿ 0 ÿ + ÿ ÿ 90
0
q ÿ
In the case of stratified soil, the physical and mechanical parameters, which intervene in the formula, are
analyses.
In the case of eccentric loading, the value of the bearing capacity thus determined can be multiplied
for the Bowles correction coefficients , or the reduced base B' can appear in the term Nÿ and in the
expressions of the correction coefficients can be considered the reduced dimensions B' and L' as
suggests Meyerhof. These settings are made by the User in the Analysis Options window.
27.4 Vesic method

The Vesic formula for calculating the bearing capacity is similar to the Hansen formula. Change
only the factor Nÿ and the expression of some coefficients. We report all the expressions in full
referring to what is said in the section relating to the Hansen method for any limitations e
clarifications.
General case
cN=sdigb
q last cccccc
+ digb
qN sdigb Bs qqqqqq
+ 0.5 ÿ
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ
Case of purely cohesive soil ÿ = 0
q last = 514 sdigb )c q+

. c(1+ +
ÿ ÿ ÿ
c c c c
The factors Nc, Nq, Nÿ are expressed as:
= ÿ1)ctg ÿ
Nc (N = K
ÿ news
ÿ No ÿ
q Nq and p ÿ = 2(Nq +1)tg
Form factors
For ÿ = 0 B --- ---

sc = 0.2
L
For ÿ > 0 No B B B
q
s c =1+ sq =1+ L ÿ
news s ÿ =1ÿ 0.4
Noc L L
Depth factors
For ÿ = 0 d c = 0.4k --- ---
For ÿ > 0 d c = 1+ 0.4k d =1+ 2news 2

ÿ (1ÿleft ÿ ) k dÿ =1
q

D D D D
k = if ÿ1 k = arctg if ÿ1
B B B B
For ÿ = 0 mH
i c= --- ---
Afac
cN
For ÿ > 0 ÿ ÿ
m
ÿ ÿ
m+ 1
1 ÿ
the
q H H
the
c
=ÿ
the
q
the
=ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ
the
=ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ
No q 1 q
VA+c ctg ÿ ÿ ÿ
VA+c ctg ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ does ÿ does
The parameter m is defined as:

2 + BL/
m =
1 + BL/
Inclination factors of the foundation laying surface

232
By indicating with ÿ the slope of the foundation laying surface, the b factors are obtained from
following expressions:
For ÿ = 0 ÿ
or
bc = --- ---
or
147
For ÿ > 0 or
ÿ bÿ = 1ÿ
bc 1 ( bq = 1ÿ ÿ tan ÿ ( ÿ tan ÿ
=ÿ
)2 )2
147
Terrain inclination factors
Indicating the steepness of the slope with ÿ, the g factors are obtained from the following expressions:
For ÿ = 0 or
= ÿ --- ---
gc
147
For ÿ > 0 or
ÿ
gc
=ÿ
1 g q = 1ÿ
( tan ÿ )2 gÿ =ÿ
(1 tan ÿ )2
147
In the case of stratified soil, the physical and mechanical parameters involved in the formula are
analyses.
In the case of eccentric loading, the value of the bearing capacity thus determined can be multiplied
for the Bowles correction coefficients, or the reduced base B' can appear in the term Nÿ and in the
expressions of the correction coefficients can be considered the reduced dimensions B' and L' as Meyerhof
suggests. These settings are made by the User in the Analysis Options window.
27.5 Formula Cascone (2006)

The calculation method proposed by Cascone et al. (2006), approaches the calculation of the bearing capacity of
superficial foundations in the seismic field, considering a reduction of the capacity factor only
carrier Nÿ.
The limit load is evaluated using the Terzaghi trinomial formula.
Two different seismic coefficients are introduced in the method: Khk to consider the acceleration in
foundation due to the seismic response of the ground, and Khi to take into account the inertial effect, i.e
of the acceleration imparted to the foundation by the inertia of the superstructure.
Two correction factors have been proposed, both of which must be multiplied by the
coefficient Nÿ obtained from the static field analysis:
eÿk = (1-khk /tan(ÿ))0.45 valid for kh <=tan(ÿ)
0.45
eÿi = (1-0.7*khi)
Khk can be assimilated to the horizontal seismic coefficient kh.
Khi can be defined as “the ratio between the vertical and horizontal components of the transmitted loads
in foundation" (Circular n.617/CSLL.PP./2009 at point 7.11.5.3.1).

This method is calibrated until Kh<=0.30
27.6 Bearing capacity in the presence of aquifer
In the case of foundation soil with a water table, API++ performs the calculation of the limit load according to
this procedure.
The height of the breaking wedge is determined. If the lift calculation method is that of Terzaghi, the height of the wedge is given
by the relation Hs = 0.5 B tan ÿ, otherwise the relation is Hs =
0.5 B tan (45° + ÿ/2).
If the height of the rupture wedge determined in this way is lower than the level of the water table, this does not
is taken into account and the bearing capacity calculation is performed normally.
In the event that the height of the breaking wedge is greater than the level of the water table, the procedure
followed is as follows:
ÿ the bearing capacity qult is determined using the parameters of the soil layer above the
aquifer with one of the exposed methods. With this operation it was assumed that the breaking wedge
has a height equal to the distance between the base of the foundation and the level of the pitch;
ÿ assuming that the failure occurs by punching, according to a limited failure surface
from the perimeter of the base and, taking into account the additional contribution q due to the thickness layer
d1, q'ult is calculated for the bottom layer using these parameters.
ÿ the values qult and q'ult are compared, assuming the lesser of the two as the ultimate load of the foundation.
In analytical form the expression of q'ult is the following:
' '' p PKv ÿ s

tan pdc 1
= + +
q last q last
TO TO
f f
where q”ult is the bearing capacity of the layer below the water table, calculated using one of the methods described but using
the width of the foundation B, the contribution of the overload q = ÿ d1, the cohesion ce
the friction angle ÿ of the layer under the water table; p is the perimeter of the punching surface; Pv is the

234
total vertical thrust from the base of the foundation to the layer below the water table; Ks is the thrust coefficient
lateral of the ground, between [ tan2 (45° - ÿ/2) and tan2 (45° + ÿ/2) ], or taken equal to K0; tan ÿ is the friction coefficient along
the perimeter surface of the punched area; [ p × d1 × c ] is the resultant
of the stresses linked to the cohesion acting on the perimeter surface of the punched area; Af is the area
of the foundation; d1 distance between the base of the foundation and the layer under the water table.
28 Limit load of foundation piles
When the bearing capacity of the foundation soil is insufficient to guarantee stability or stability
functionality of a structure, the pole technique is used; these allow the discharge of the structure itself to be transferred towards
the deeper layers of the ground which, generally, have characteristics
better mechanics. Foundation piles are also used when strong forces must be absorbed
horizontal or when you want to compact loose soil.
The piles are differentiated based on the execution methods: driven piles (made without removal of soil) and bored piles (with
removal of soil). Furthermore, based on the diameter they are distinguished,
conventionally, large diameter piles (D > 80 cm) small and medium diameter piles (20 cm < D <
80 cm) and micropiles (D < 20 cm). The latter are widely used in the field of foundations and
of consolidations thanks to widespread and low-cost technology.
Once the type of piles to be adopted for a foundation has been established, the section must be calculated based on the loads
that the structure transmits, to the type of pole adopted, to the characteristics of the terrain crossed. It's necessary
then determine the bearing capacity of the pile at both axial and transverse loads.
28.1 Determination of bearing capacity
To analyze the load-bearing capacity of the piles, it is necessary to determine some characteristics of the soil
which you are going to operate on. In particular, it is necessary to know the friction angle ÿ and the cohesion c. For poles
subjected to transverse loads it is necessary to know the lateral reaction modulus or the elastic modulus
lateral.
The bearing capacity of a pile is usually evaluated as the sum of two contributions: base load
(or tip) and carried by lateral friction along the stem. That is, the expression is assumed to be valid:
QT = QP + QL - WP
Where
ÿ QT, Total bearing capacity of the pile;
ÿ QP, Base bearing capacity of the pile;
ÿ QL, Bearing capacity due to lateral friction of the pile;
ÿ WP, Self weight of the pile.
The two components QP and QL are calculated independently of each other. It turns out to be very difficult,
except in a few situations, establish how much of the load is absorbed by lateral friction and how much
for base resistance.
In the case of piles subject to traction, the resistance to extraction is:

QT = QL+WP
The permissible load of the pile QA is obtained from the bearing capacity of the pile by applying the safety coefficient of the
bearing capacity at the tip ÿP and the safety coefficient of the bearing capacity due to lateral friction
ÿL.

236
Compressed pole
QQ
P L
Q TO
=+ÿ W
ÿ P ÿ L
Tense pole
L +
= QW
Q TO
ÿ L
28.2 Peak bearing capacity
In general the peak bearing capacity is calculated using the expression:
Q P= A cNP +( q c bNq )
where AP is the effective bearing area of the pile tip, c is the cohesion, qb is the earth pressure
to the height of the pile tip and the coefficients Nc and Nq are the coefficients of the capacity formulas
carrier corrected to account for depth effects.
Nc and Nq depend both on the geometry of the pile and on the characteristics of the ground: friction angle
and cohesion (ÿ ec).
In the literature it is possible to find different formulas for calculating the values of Nc and Nq.
For clay piles in undrained conditions (ÿ=0, c = cu) the proposed value is generally assumed for Nc
by Skempton equal to 9 (value at the tip of the pole) while Nq=1. Several authors
have proposed other values for the Nc factor but in general the variations are quite limited.
The case of the factor Nq is different, for which different authors propose values that are often very high
discordant with each other.
In particular, from tests carried out on piles made in non-cohesive soils, it was seen that the variation
of the tip resistance does not increase linearly with depth, but reaches a certain value
it remains almost constant.
This phenomenon was explained by Vesic by taking into account an "arc effect" which manifests itself in
proximity to the pole.
A simple way to account for the fact that tip resistance cannot grow
indefinitely, is to consider the vertical pressure diagram at the pole
appropriately modified.
In particular, it is assumed that the vertical pressure ÿv grows linearly (geostatic pressure) up
to a certain depth zc ( ÿv = ÿc ); once this depth is exceeded, the value of the vertical pressure decreases
keeps constant and equal to ÿc: in practice a bilateral diagram is assumed for the trend of the
vertical pressure at the pole.
The value of zc (also called critical depth) depends on the diameter of the pile, D, on the technology
construction (driven or bored pile) from the ground friction angle ÿ.
In determining zc the value of ÿ to be considered is a function of
value of the friction angle before the installation of the pile, ÿ', according to
following reports
For driven poles:

3 ÿ
= + 10
ÿ ÿ
4
For bored piles:

ÿ
= ÿ3
ÿ ÿ
For the same diameter, the degree of densification of the soil (density
relative Dr) and the tip resistance increases as the density increases.
In the next section we will describe the relations for the determination of Nc and Nq according to the various
authors.
28.3 Calculation of the coefficients Nc and Nq
In all the expressions reported the following symbolism was used:
pole length (L);

ÿ
pole diameter (D);

ÿ
ground friction angle (ÿ);

ÿ
soil cohesion (c);

ÿ
passive thrust coefficient kP = tan2 ( 45 + ÿ / 2 );

ÿ
depth factor for the coefficient Nc (dc);

ÿ
depth factor for the coefficient Nq (dq).

ÿ
28.3.1 Terzaghi
Cohesive term Term overload
2
And
(0.75 ÿ ÿ / 2)tan ÿ
ÿ
= )
Bearing capacity factors Nc = (Nq ÿ1)cotÿ Nq 2
( 2 cos (45 / 2)+ ÿ
28.3.2 Meyerhof
ÿ tanÿ
Bearing capacity factors N ek =
Nc = (Nq ÿ1)cotÿ q p
L
For ÿ = 0 dc 2 Kp =1+ 0. d =1
q
D
238
L L
for ÿ > 0 dc 2 Kp =1+ 0. dq 1 Kp =1+ 0. D
D
c cNc N = d qNq
q N=d
28.3.3 Hansen

tanÿ
Bearing capacity factors Nc = (Nq ÿ1)cotÿ =
N qek
ÿ
For ÿ = 0 d c = 0.4k ---
2
for ÿ > 0 d c = 1+ 0.4k d ÿ(
=1+ 2tan 1ÿsyn ÿ) k
q
c cNc N = d q qNq N = d

L
k = arctg
D
28.3.4 Vesic

tanÿ
Bearing capacity factors Nc = (Nq ÿ1)cotÿ =
N qek
ÿ
For ÿ = 0 d c = 0.4k ---
2
for ÿ > 0 d c = 1+ 0.4k dq ÿ(
=1+ 2tan 1ÿsyn ÿ) k
c cNc N = d qNq
q ÿ =d
N
The parameter k and n are defined as:

L 2K 1 0 +
k = arctg ÿ =
D 3
where K0 is the thrust coefficient at rest

28.3.5 Berezantzev
The Nq values proposed by Berezantzev for non-cohesive soils
are shown in the graph as a function of the friction angle ÿ.
Indicating with ÿ' the value of the friction angle first
of the pole installation, the values of ÿ to be adopted for the
calculation of Nq are:
for driven poles

ÿ
ÿ ÿ
+ 40
ÿ =
2
for bored piles

ÿ
ÿ = ÿ ÿ3
28.3.6 Berezantzev reduced
In 1963 Berezantzev proposed for non-cohesive soils a
further graph showing the Nq values
reduced, depending on the L/D ratio, between the length and diameter
of the pile, and the ground friction angle ÿ.
Indicating with ÿ' the value of the friction angle first
of the pole installation, the values of ÿ to be adopted for the
calculation of Nq are:
for driven poles

ÿ
ÿ + 40
ÿ =
2
for bored piles

ÿ
ÿ = ÿ ÿ3

240
28.4 Bearing capacity according to Bustamante – Doix (micropiles)
In the case of valved micropiles, API provides the user with the possibility of carrying out the calculation
of the pile's bearing capacity according to the recommendations published by Bustamante and Doix in 1985.
These recommendations are the basis of the regulations in force in France (both for the calculation of micropiles and
lim p
of the tie rods) and require knowledge of the limit pressure determined with the pressure gauge
Ménard or the results of SPT tests.

Lateral resistance
In the case of micropiles installed in sandy soils, the following relationships can be hypothesized between the
d in d
diameter of the injected area and that of drilling perfect :
d ÿin1.5 d
perfect
(repeated injections)
d ÿin 1.15 d
perfect
(single injection)
The value of the tangential tension in the injected section can be assumed to be equal to on average
1
f ÿs plim 10 .
The value of the limit pressure can be correlated to the results of the penetrometric tests via the
following relationships:
p limit
NoSPT 1 qc
ÿ ÿ
p to
2 10 p to
p to qc
in which is the reference atmospheric pressure e is the pressure at the tip.
In the case of micropiles installed in clayey soils, we have:
d ÿin1.5 ÿ 2.0 d
perfect
d ÿin1.2 d
perfect
(single injection).
The limiting tangential stress is given by the following expressions (the values are expressed in N/mm2):
f =s 0.033+ 0.067 p limit

(single injection)
f =s 0.095+ 0.085p limit

in which the limit pressure is given by:
p ÿlimit
10 c u.
In the case of micropiles installed in marl, the following indicative values of the diameter in the area are obtained
injected:
d ÿin1.5 d
perfect
d ÿin 1.15 d
perfect
(single injection).
The limiting tangential stress can be estimated with the following expressions:
f =s 0.10 + 0.05p limit

(single injection)
f =s 0.133+ 0.067 p limit

and to estimate the limit pressure the following relationship can be used:
p limit
NoSPT 1 qc
ÿ ÿ
2 .
p to
10 p to
L in
Ultimately the lift due to lateral friction, called the length of the injected section is equal to:
LL
ÿ
in L
= ÿ + ÿ
QL ÿ0 df perfect
right s ÿLL
ÿ df inright
s .
in
The graphs of the lateral pressure as a function of the limit pressure (Plim) or the number of strokes of the
SPT test, are shown below.

242


244
Peak resistance
As regards tip resistance, the authors Bustamante and Doix recommend hiring
for the same a percentage of the lateral resistance. This percentage can be equal to 15%.
28.5 Bearing capacity for lateral resistance
The lateral bearing capacity is given by the integral extended to the entire lateral surface of the tension pile
pole-soil tangential roads in limited conditions:
QL ÿ = ÿ to
dS
S
where ÿa is given by the well-known Coulomb relation:
ÿ to = ca + ÿ h news
ÿ
where ca is the pile-soil adhesion, ÿ is the pile-soil friction angle, and ÿh is the horizontal tension at
generic depth z. The horizontal tension ÿh is related to the vertical pressure ÿv via a
thrust coefficient Ks.
ÿh = Ks ÿv
ultimately, indicating the perimeter with C and the length of the pole with L we have:
L
QCL (c=Kÿ tg ) dz to
+ s
ÿ v ÿ
0
Ca adhesion, which occurs only in clayey media, is a portion of the cohesion and depends on many
factors such as pole type, soil type and installation method.

In the case of cohesive soils in undrained conditions (c = cU), the ca/cu ratio is the greater the
the lower the value of cohesion cu. For cu values lower than 5 T/m2 it can be assumed ca = cU e per
higher values of cohesion can be assumed for ca a rate of cohesion cu between 0.8
and 0.2.
The value of the pole-soil friction angle also depends on the type of pole and the methods of
realization. Several authors recommend taking values of ÿ = ÿ for concrete piles and values
slightly lower (2/3 ÿ 3/4 ÿ) for steel poles.
The value of Ks (thrust coefficient) essentially depends on the type of soil and its state
densification and the technology used.
For soft clay piles Burland suggests the value of the resting thrust coefficient Ko = 1 - sinÿ as the lower
limit for Ks. Conversely, for overconsolidated clays the value is suggested:
Ks = K0 = (1ÿ sinÿ ) OCR
where OCR represents the degree of overconsolidation.
Several other authors, based on experimental results, recommend Ks values varying between 0.5 (pile in
steel in loose soil) and 3 (concrete pile driven into place in dense soil).
For sand piles some authors (Vesic) believe that the lateral resistance increases up to a certain level
depth after which it remains constant. This depth (zc) depends on the diameter of the pile and the
state of densification of the sand.
The value of Ks for driven piles can vary from a value close to Kp, at the top, to lower values
at Ko near the tip. For bored piles we have significantly lower Ks values.
A separate consideration must be made for micropiles. The execution methods of a micropile (injection
pressure of cement mortar) are such as to create a strong compaction of the surrounding soil
with debulking of the lateral surface which in some cases leads to a notable increase in the
theoretical surface. You can certainly use a value of ÿ = ÿ and values of Ks greater than unity.
It is clear, from what has been said so far, that the determination of the bearing capacity of a pile is not
simple, taking into account all the uncertainties relating to the behavior of the soils and their
characterization.
In many cases, for pilings of a certain importance, direct load tests are used to detect the
sagging load curve and directly determining the limit load. This is the best method but
more expensive.
For driven piles there are other calculation methods (the so-called dynamic formulas) for which we refer to
specialist texts.

246
28.6 Bearing capacity for horizontal loads

The analysis of the pile subjected to horizontal forces is certainly not easier than the case of a pile
subject to axial forces. This is an interaction problem partially solved only for multiple cases
simple and adopting notable analysis simplifications. In particular they were analyzed by Broms il
case of a pile in a purely cohesive homogeneous medium and in an incoherent homogeneous medium, in
cases in which the pole is free to rotate overhead or is stuck. The solutions obtained from Broms do
are based on the use of limit analysis theorems and on the hypothesis that some mechanisms occur
breakage (short pole mechanism, long pole mechanism, etc).
The lateral limit resistance of a pile is determined by the minimum value between the horizontal load,
necessary to produce the collapse of the soil along the pile shaft, and the horizontal load
necessary to produce plasticization of the pile. The first mechanism (plasticization of the
soil) occurs in the case of very rigid piles in poorly resistant soil (short pile mechanism),
while the second mechanism occurs in the case of piles having rigidity that is not excessive compared to
the driving soil (long or intermediate pile mechanism).
28.6.1 Limit resistance of the soil
The limit resistance of the soil represents the limit value of resistance that the soil can exert
when the pile is subjected to a horizontal load. The limiting resistance pu = pu(z) depends on the
characteristics of the soil and the geometry of the pile. In purely cohesive soils (c = cU, ÿ=0) the
resistance increases from zero at the top to a limit value at one
depth equal to approximately 3 diameters. The limit value in this case varies between 8 and 12 cU.
In the case of soils with friction and cohesion, the limiting resistance at a generic depth z can
be represented by the relationship (Brinch Hansen)
Pu = qKpq+cKpc
Where
D pole diameter
q geostatic pressure at depth z
c cohesion at depth z
Kpq, Kpc coefficients function of the ground friction angle ÿ and the z/D ratio
Broms performed the analysis considering the case of both a fixed pole and a free pole
immersed in a homogeneous medium.
Case of cohesive soils
Broms assumes in this case, a zero resistance diagram up to a depth equal to [ 1.5 D ]
and then a constant value equal to [ 9 cU D ].
Case of inconsistent terrain
In the case of loose soils, Broms assumes that the lateral resistance varies with depth
from the value [ 0 ] (at the top) up to the value [ 3 ÿV kP D ] (at the base) kP being the resistance coefficient
passive expressed by:
kP = tan2 (45° + ÿ / 2).
28.6.2 Limit resistance of the pile
The pole is modeled as a beam with a circular section with elastoplastic behavior
perfect with ultimate moment equal to Mu.
The ultimate moment of the pile, Mu, depends on the amount of reinforcement present in the section. Cutting
the latter is determined with an incremental elastic-plastic process: the pile, considered immersed
in the ground, is subjected to an increasing system of actions, composed of a horizontal force and
one moment. The limit value of the shear, Tu, of the pile is drawn either by reaching the moment
last of the pole in some section or due to breaking of the ground.

248
28.7 Calculation of foundation pile settlements
28.7.1 Finite Element Method (FEM)
Once the lateral and tip bearing capacity of the pile has been determined, it is discretized into 100 typical elements
beam having area and inertia corresponding to the cross section of the pole and length equal to le.
Furthermore, a series of coaxial springs (one for each element) are arranged along the shaft of the pole
to the pole itself, having appropriate stiffness. A further spring is placed at the base of the pole. The
the aforementioned springs have an elastoplastic behavior. In particular, the springs along the shaft will be able to
react linearly until the pressure in correspondence with them reaches the
limit value of pole-soil adhesion. Once this value is reached the springs will no longer be in place
capable of providing additional resistance. The spring located at the base of the pole will instead have a resistance
limit equal to the tip bearing capacity of the pile itself.
To determine the stiffness of the springs, the limit displacements are considered ÿ Yl e ÿ YP
(defined by the User in the Settlement Method window).

The stiffness of the generic spring, placed at depth z with respect to the ground level, will be given by:
( cK+ ÿ hs tan ÿ ÿ) Dl
RL =
to And
ÿ YL
In this expression ca is the pole adhesion to the ground, ÿ h is the horizontal pressure at depth z, ÿ è
the angle of friction between the pile and the ground, Ks is the thrust coefficient and D is the diameter of the pile.
Indicating with Qp the lift at the tip of the pole, the stiffness of the spring located at the base of the same
is given by:
Qp
R =
p
ÿY
p
The solution process is, naturally, iterative: starting from an initial load N0 yes
determine the axial displacements and therefore the reactions of the springs. The spring reaction will have to
be corrected to take into account any plasticization while respecting the equilibrium equations for
each loading step. The initial load will then be increased by an appropriate step and the load will be repeated
method. The iterative process ends when all the springs are plasticized.
28.8 Terrain modeling
The most common models for schematizing the terrain are the continuous elastic model and the Winkler model.
The elastic continuum model schematizes the soil as a homogeneous and isotropic medium
characterized by the elastic modulus E and the Poisson modulus ÿ. The determination of these parameters
can be obtained through laboratory tests on undisturbed samples (when possible
collect them).
In Winkler's model the ground is schematized as a series of elastic springs independent of each other
They. The springs that schematize the ground are characterized by an elastic stiffness constant, Kh, expressed in Kg/
cm²/cm which represents the pressure (in Kg/cm²) that must be applied
to obtain the displacement of 1 cm. The determination of this constant can be done either by
load tests on plates or by (conventional) analytical methods.

The variation of the Winkler constant with depth depends on the type of soil in which the pile is
absorbed.
For example, in the case of cohesive soils in undrained conditions Kh takes on a constant value with la
depth while in the case of inconsistent soils the variation of Kh is linear (increasing with the
depth). In general the expression of Kh takes a binomial form of the type
Kh(z) = A + Bzn
API++ uses the Winkler model for the analysis of transversely loaded piles.
The pole is divided into a certain number of beam-type elements having an area and inertia equal to that
of the cross section of the pile. At each node the separation between the various elements is
a horizontal spring of appropriate stiffness is inserted which schematizes the ground.

The behavior of the springs that schematize the ground is not infinitely elastic but is of a type
elastoplastic. The single spring reacts up to a limit value of displacement or reaction; a

once this limit has been exceeded the spring does not offer further increases in resistance (diagram
perfect elastoplastic type).
Indicating with dye the length of the influence section of the spring, with D the diameter of the spring pole
will have a stiffness equal to
Km=dye x D x Kh
28.8.1 Finite element analysis
In the finite element method it is necessary to discretize the particular problem. In this specific case the pole
is divided into a certain number of elements of equal length. Each element is characterized by
a section having area and inertia coinciding with that of the pole.
The ground is schematized as a series of horizontal springs that react to movements in the
two verses. The axial stiffness of the single spring is proportional to the horizontal Winkler constant

250
of the ground, the diameter of the pile and the length of the element. The spring, however, is not seen as
an infinitely elastic element but as an element with elastoplastic type behavior
perfect (bilateral stress-strain diagram).
It presents an increasing resistance as the displacements increase until the magnitude of the
displacements remains below a certain limit displacement (Xmax.) or until
the limit pressure value is reached. Once this limit is exceeded there is no increase in resistance.
It is clear that by engaging in behavior of this type we are entering into a typical problem
linear that can only be resolved by step analysis.
This modeling has the notable advantage of being able to schematize all those behaviors
identified by Broms and which would be impossible to treat in a numerical model. In particular it turns out
automatically analyze cases in which there is insufficient bearing capacity not due to breakage of the pole but due to breakage of the
ground (see the case of a very rigid pole in soft ground).

The behavior of the pile is modeled using the values attributed to the horizontal Winkler constant
Kh. For example, for piles in a cohesive medium the resistance diagram is of a constant rectangular type
at times. Conversely, for an incoherent medium the resistance diagram is approximately
triangular with vertex at the top.
In the first case, the foundation soil can be schematized with a series of layers with constant Kh
along the depth; in the second case it can be schematized with a series of layers with increasing Kh
linearly with depth.
29 Calculation and arrangement of reinforcement.
The calculation and arrangement of the reinforcements of plate-calculated structures is more complex than the
calculation of the reinforcement of a beam due to the state of multi-axial stress that is generated in the structural element. In fact,
the stresses acting at a generic point are:
• MX bending moments
• MY bending moments
• MXY torques
• NX membrane action
• NY membrane action
• NXY membrane action
Furthermore, while the beam, by definition, is characterized by a direction that coincides with the direction
(principal stress) of the reinforcements to be placed in a plate we do not have such
simplification.
In theory we should arrange the armatures according to the main directions which, of course, vary from
point to point. In design practice, a more intuitive method is used which simplifies the process
layout of the armor mesh from an operational point of view.
• Two reinforcement directions are set orthogonal to each other (ÿ and ÿ=ÿ+90°).
• The plate is ideally divided into two families of beams arranged in the ÿ and in directions
direction ÿ.
• Starting from the punctual stresses obtained from the FEM analysis, the stresses of
project along the ideal beams in a number of sections
• With these stresses, the areas of reinforcement necessary to absorb the stresses are calculated and yes
arrange the shapes of the irons.
We will see the details of the various points set out above.
The reinforcement directions are set based on the particular case analyzed. From the moment diagram
principals (maximums and minimums) it is possible to identify which reinforcement directions are
it would be better to choose from a mechanical point of view. The choice of warping angle is very often
conditioned by practical operational considerations.
For example, on a square plate the most immediate and simple choice is to fix the reinforcement directions parallel to the sides
obtaining equal "cuts" and therefore a great simplification in the
installation of the irons. If you wanted to follow the trend of the main stress directions
we should have armor both parallel to the sides and armor arranged along the diagonals.

252
The situation becomes more complicated when you have plates with a non-simple shape. In that case try to
identifying directions is not at all easy. Therefore the choice of direction must be
made by the designer on a case-by-case basis.
Once the reinforcement directions have been chosen (Reinforcement menu->Plate Reinforcement Options) ÿ and ÿ=ÿ+90° yes
divides the plate into many ideal beams according to the directions ÿ and ÿ. The width of such beams comes
assumed equal to Bt=1 meter (approximately). Since it is possible to analyze plates of generic shape this
width is indicative only. In fact, any recesses or inclined sides can lead to variations
of the width Bt.
In the case of the rectangular plate in the figure, for example, the ideal beams have a constant width Bt.
While in the next figure there are ideal beams with variable width. Give simple examples below
reported, it is clear that this variability can be absolutely generic.
Once the ideal beams have been identified, a series of sections are established lengthwise
calculation (API++ inserts a calculation section every 0.25 meters).
At this point the problem arises of determining the calculation stresses for each section (of each
ideal beam).

254
On the length from the section
we take a certain number of sampling points (API+
+ takes 5 points
sampling for each section).
From the solution (nodal values) obtained

from finite element analysis and through
the interpolation functions of
elements used we calculate, in each
point Of sampling, the
stresses and their main values

maximums and minimums.
The calculation stress on
section is obtained by adding i
weighted contributions of the values obtained in the
sampling points.
In the calculation of bending reinforcement
the values of the maximum and minimum principal moments projected in the direction of are used
armor. This means that the amount of reinforcement to be placed is determined not only by the moments
limbs Mx, My but also from the torque Mxy.
Starting from the areas of reinforcement necessary for each section of each ideal beam, the
iron shapes for each beam. In this phase the program also arranges the minimum reinforcements
set by the User in the Armor Options window.
In this phase of layout of the shapes API++ is able to recognize variations in thickness
along the ideal beam, variations in its width, exceeding the length of the bars,
etc.
At the end of this process API++ returns the shapes of all the irons of the plate in both directions
set and for each flap.

29.1 Optimization in the arrangement of reinforcements.
Once the armor has been arranged it is possible to view it
graphically. The program in the display of
armature offers various options (window a
side):
If you activate the Out of Mesh option they are only displayed
the weaves added to the base mesh (to be set in
Plate Armor Options) before the armor design.
If you realize that the weaves out of mesh in a
direction are excessive it is probably best to set
a tighter mesh. Thus the need for armor out
mesh is reduced. These considerations can be made for everyone

reinforcement direction and for each edge (lower or upper).
From the window you can select both the direction and the
desired position (flap).
Other optimizations can be achieved through window armor specific panels
Armor Options.

256
30 Calculation of reinforcement and verification of sections
30.1 Allowable voltages
The following values were assumed for the allowable concrete stresses, in line with the Regulations:
R bk ÿ
150 2
ÿ approx
= +60 Kg/cm
4
' R bk ÿ
150 2
ÿ co = +4 Kg/cm
75
" R bk ÿ
150 2
ÿ co = +14 Kg/cm
35
The absorption of the sliding effort was entrusted to the profiles. Tangential tension comes
determined using the approximate formula:
T
ÿ =
0.85 bh
ÿÿ
where T is the cut in the section considered, b and h represent the base and the useful height of the
section.
The necessary shaped area is determined by considering the sliding effort between the sections
where the tangential stress ÿ'co is exceeded. The arrangement in the design phase is done in such a way
such that in each section where the limit value ÿ'co is exceeded the appropriate quantity of is placed
armor. Thus the sliding stress is absorbed both globally and locally. Vice versa
when modifying the reinforcements, only the quantity of shear reinforcement is checked
sufficient to absorb the global sliding stress in the section where these reinforcements are necessary.
In addition to the brackets, if necessary, shaped parts are arranged to absorb the residual part of the
sliding effort.
30.2 Theoretical references on verification with the ultimate limit state method
A "limit state" is defined as any state of insufficiency of the structure, that is, any situation starting from
which the structure, or one of its parts, ceases to perform the function for which it was intended and for the
which it was designed and built.
The ultimate limit states are linked to the maximum load-bearing capacity of the structure; in other words the
exceeding these states leads to the ruin of the structure.
The safety verification of a structure, conducted using the semi-probabilistic state method
ultimate limit, consists in comparing the calculation stresses with those compatible with the state
ultimate limit. The semi-probabilistic method requires that i be used for actions and resistances
their characteristic values.
The calculation values are the values to be assumed in the design of the structures to cover the probability
of execution and evaluation errors, as well as the approximations and imperfections of the methods
calculation.
Let us now delve into the merits of limit states for normal stresses.
The ultimate limit states for stresses that generate normal stresses are those resulting from
normal stresses, bending and pressure or tensile bending stresses.

The determination of the ultimate limit state in the section of these members is carried out in
hypothesis that:
- the sections remain flat until failure; the deformation diagram in the section is preserved
straight;
- adhesion between steel and concrete;

-
concrete is considered not to react in tension.
Furthermore, the constitutive bonds specified below are assumed for the materials.
For the conglomerate it is assumed as
constitutive bond that defined by
parabola-rectangle of the CEB (Committee
European of the Concrete),

considering the material exclusively
reagent for compressive stresses
(see figure).
It is made up of two branches: the first, of
elastic-plastic type, defined by an arc of
second degree parabola passing through
the origin and with an axis parallel to it

258
of the ordinates; the horizontal tangent, extended until the ultimate deformation, constitutes the second
straight section with perfectly plastic behavior and limited deformation.
Indicate with Rc* the calculation resistance, with ÿck the deformation at the point of
separation between the elastic-plastic behavior and the perfectly plastic one, and with ÿcu the ultimate deformation of the
conglomerate, the constitutive link is expressed by the following relations,
considering the deformations ÿc and the compression stresses ÿc positive:
* 2
2R c ÿ ÿ c ÿ
ÿ = ÿ c - ÿ c ÿ ck
c
ÿ ÿ
for 0 ÿ ÿ
ÿ ck
ÿ
2 ÿ ck
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
*
ÿ = R ÿ ck ÿ ÿÿ ÿ cu
c c For c
The maximum ordinate Rc* is given by
* 0 .85 0 83
ÿ . ÿ R bk
R =
c
ÿc
where Rbk is the characteristic resistance relating to cubic shaped specimens, 0.83 is a reduction coefficient
which allows the transition to the prismatic characteristic resistance, 0.85 is a reduction coefficient which
takes into account the possible effect on the resistance of a long duration of the load.
For ultimate limit states the regulations attribute the value to the coefficient ÿc: ÿc = 1.6.
The other characteristic quantities used in the formulas have the following values:
ÿck = 0.2% ÿcu = 0.35%
As far as steel goes

considered to behavior
elastic-perfectly plastic a
limited deformation and tensile deformation
than compression.
Indicated with fyk resistance
yield characteristic a
traction, ÿsyk the deformation of
tensile yielding, ÿsu la
limit strain under tension and with
Rs* = fyk / ÿs the calculation resistance a
traction, the constitutive bond results

defined by a bilateral obtained from
characteristic diagram carrying out

an “affinity” parallel to the tangent to the origin in the ratio 1/ÿs.
The standards prescribe the value for the limit deformation of steel:
ÿup = 1%
For the coefficient ÿs of the material, the standards prescribe:
ÿs = 1.15 for factory-controlled steel;
ÿs = 1.30 for uncontrolled steel.
For all types of steel the elastic modulus at the origin is assumed to be equal to:
Ex = 2,100,000 Kg/cm2
The constitutive link (or calculation diagram) is therefore defined by the following relations:
ÿ = ÿ s ÿ s ÿ
s
AND
s for 0 ÿ ÿ sy
*
ÿ = R ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ on
s s For sy s
*
where ÿsy = Rs / Ex.
30.2.1 Concrete confinement
The diagram for concrete can be the rectangle parabola diagram traditionally used in section verification, or a similar diagram that takes
into account the confinement effect
exercised by the stirrups.
260
In this diagram ÿ cu2 represents the ultimate deformation of the concrete, ÿ c2 represents the deformation
at yield point, fck represents the characteristic cylindrical resistance and fcd the design resistance
expressed as
fcd=fck/ ÿ c
with ÿ c safety coefficient on the resistance of the material. The following values are assumed for the
deformations of the concrete
ÿc2 =0.002 ÿcu2 =0.0035
The expression of the function ÿ c=f(c)ÿ is the following

2
ÿ ÿ c ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
c
ÿ c = ÿ
2 ÿ
ÿ
ÿ c ÿ ÿ c2
f CD
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
For (TO)
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ
c2 ÿ c2 ÿ ÿ
ÿ c =f CD For ÿ c2
ÿ ÿ c ÿ ÿ cu 2
To take into account the beneficial effect of the confinement exerted by the stirrups on the concrete core
it is possible to use a similar diagram with correct ordinates, using factors that take into account
of the confinement effect. This correction factor therefore depends on the arrangement of the brackets
present on the structural element (diameter and pitch). The formulation proposed by Kent and Park
proposes a correction factor K expressed as
ÿ yes
f yk
K = +1
ÿ
f c
Where
ÿs ratio between the volume of the stirrups and the volume of the encircled concrete
fyk characteristic yield strength of the stirrup steel
f'c cylindrical compressive strength of concrete
The yield value of concrete becomes ÿ c2=0.002K
For example, if we consider a pole with a circular section D=50 cm made of concrete
class C20/25 and reinforced with ÿ16 irons and ÿ10 brackets (B450C type steel) we obtain the following values of
parameter K as the distance between the brackets varies:
Center distance 20 cm K=1.1355
A rectangle parabola diagram is therefore assumed with ordinates increased by the factor K.

262
30.3 Values of physical characteristics of the land
Indicative values of the Winkler constant K (Kg/cm3)

Ground
Loose sand 0.48 1.60
Medium compact sand 0.96 8.00

Compact sand 6.40 12.80
Medium compact clayey sand 2.40 4.80
Medium compact silty sand 2.40 4.80
Compact sand and gravel 10.00 30.00
Clayey soil with qu< 2 Kg/cm² 1.20 2.40
Clayey soil with 2< qu< 4 Kg/cm² 2.20 4.80
Clayey soil with qu> 2 Kg/cm² >4.80
Indicative values of volume weight in Kg/m³

Ground
Dry gravel 1800 2000
Wet gravel 1900 2100
Compact dry sand 1700 2000
Compact moist sand 1900 2100
Compact wet sand 2000 2200

Loose dry sand 1500 1800
Loose moist sand 1600 1900
Loose wet sand 1900 2100
Sandy clay 1800 2200
Hard clay 2000 2100
Semi-solid clay 1900 1950
Soft clay 1800 1850

Peat 1000 1100
Indicative values of cohesion for some soils (Kg/cm²)

Sandy clay 0.20
Soft clay 0.10
Plastic clay 0.25
Semi-solid clay 0.50
Solid clay 1.00
Tough clay 2÷10
Compact silt 0.10

°
Indicative values of the friction angle ÿ
Ground
Compact gravel 35 35
Loose gravel 34 35
Compact sand 35 45
Loose sand 25 35
Sandy marl 22 29
Fatty marl 16 22
Greasy clay 0 30
Sandy clay 16 28
Silt 20 27
Specific weight of some rocks (Kg/m³)
Rock Minimum maximum
Pumice 500 1100
Volcanic tuff 1100 1750
Tuff limestone 1120 2000
Dry coarse sand 1400 1500
Dry fine sand 1400 1600
Fine damp sand 1900 2000
Sandstone 1800 2700
Dry clay 2000 2250
Soft limestone 2000 2400
Travertine 2200 2500
Dolomite 2300 2850
Compact limestone 2400 2700
Trachyte 2400 2800
Porphyry 2450 2700
Gneiss 2500 2700
Serpentine 2500 2750
Granite 2550 2900
Saccharoid marble 2700 2750

264
Syenite 2700 3000

Diorite 2750 3000
Basalt 2750 3100
Friction angles of some rocks

Rock
Granite 45 60
Dolerite 55 60
Basalt 50 55
Sandstone 35 50
Shale shale 15 30
Limestone 35 50
Quartzite 50 60
Marble 35 50
31 Bibliography
31.1 Mesh generation
The SH. A new generation scheme for arbitrary planar domain. Int. Journal for Numerical Methods in
Eng., 21:1403-1426, 1985
Talbert JA, Parkinson AR. Development of an automatic, twodimensional finite element mesh
generation using quadrilateral elements and Bezier curve boundary definition. Int J Numer Meth
Engng 29:1551–67, 1990
Baehmann, Wittchen, Shepard, Grice, Yerry. Robust, geometrically based, automatic two
dimensional mesh generation. Int. Journal for Numerical Methods in Eng., 24:1043-1078, 1987
D. Nowottny Quadrilateral Mesh Generation via Geometrically Optimized Domain Decomposition.

University of Stuttgart, Department of Mathematics
Owen, Staten, Canann, Saigal. Advancing Front Quadrilateral Meshing Using Triangle
Transformations. Department of Civil and Environment Engineering, Carnegie Mellon University,
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, USA
Sarrate, Huerta. Efficient unstructured quadrilateral mesh generation. Int. Journal for Numerical
Methods in Eng., 49:1327-1350, 2000
31.2 Finite Element Method

Cook RD - Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis – J. Wiley & Sons, 2002
Bathe, KJ – Finite Element Procedures – Prentice Hall, 1996
Onate E.- Calculus of Structures by the Method of Finite Elements – CIMNE, 1995
Zienkiewicz, Taylor, Zhu - The Finite Element Method. Its Basis and Fundamentals – Elsevier, 2005
Zienkiewicz, Taylor - The Finite Element Method. For Solid and Structural Mechanics – Elsevier, 2005
Reddy - An Introduction to The Finite Element Method – McGraw-Hill, 1993
Dhatt G., Touzot G. – The Finite Element Method Displayed - J. Wiley & Sons, 1985
Crisfield MA – Finite Elements and Solution Procedures for Structural Analysis – Pineridge Press,
1986

266
TJR Hughes – The Finite Element Method – Linear Static and Dynamic Finite Element Analysis –
Dover Publications, 2000
JL Batoz, KJ Bathe, LW Ho – A study of three-node triangular plate bending element -

International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering vol. 15, 1980
JL Batoz – An explicit formulation for an efficient triangular plate bending element - International
Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering vol. 18, 1982
JL Batoz, Ben M. Tahar – Evaluation of a new thin plate quadrilateral element - International Journal
for Numerical Methods in Engineering vol. 18, 1982
JL Batoz, I. Katili – On a simple triangular Reissner/Mindlin plate element based on incompatible

modes and discrete constraints - International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering vol. 35,
1992
Irwan Katili - A new discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin element based on Mindlin-Reissner plate theory and
assumed shear strain field – Part I : An extended DKT element for thick-plate bending analysis -
Irwan Katili - A new discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin element based on Mindlin-Reissner plate theory and
assumed shear strain field – Part II : An extended DKQ element for thick-plate bending analysis -
KJ Bathe, E. Dvorkin – A four node plate bending element based on Mindlin/Reissner plate theory
and a Mixed interpolation - International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering vol. 21, 1985
TJR Hughes, TE Tezduyar - Finite Elements based upon Mindlin plate theory with particular
reference to the four-node bilinear isoparametric element - Journal of Applied Mechanics, vol. 48 –
1981
31.3 General
BOWLES, J.E. (1988) - Foundation Analysis and Design. McGraw-Hill.
POULOS HG & DAVIS EH (1980) - Pile Foundation Analysis and Design. John Wiley & Sons.
CARLO VIGGIANI (1993) - Foundations. CUEN srl, Naples.
DE SIMONE P. (1981) - Foundations. Liguori Editore, Naples.
LAMBE WL, WHITMAN RV (1979) – Soil Mechanics. John Wiley & Sons.
BALDACCI, R (1983) - Construction science. UTET, Turin.
COMO M., LANNI G. (1979) – Elements of anti-seismic constructions. ESAC, Rome.
TERZAGHI K. & PECK RB (1967) - Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice. John Wiley & Sons.
LANCELLOTTA R. (1987) - Geotechnics. Zanichelli, Bologna.

CESTELLI GUIDI C. (1973) - Soil mechanics, foundations, earthworks. Hoepli.
ZIENKIEWICZ OC (1977) - The Finite Element Method. McGraw-Hill.
ANSEL C. UGURAL (1999) - Stress in plates and shells – MgGraw-Hill
TIMOSHENKO WOINOWSKY-KRIEGER (1959) – Theory of plates and shells – MgGraw-Hill
ELIO GIANGRECO (1977) – Construction theory and technique - Liguori
EUROCODE 1 – Calculation bases and actions on structures
EUROCODE 2 – Design of concrete structures
EUROCODE 7 – Geotechnical design
EUROCODE 8 – Design indications for the seismic resistance of structures
CNR 10025/84 – Instructions for the design, execution and control of prefabricated structures in
cement conglomerate and for structures built with industrialized systems

268
The Software for Geotechnical and Structural Engineering
Corso Umberto I, 43 - 87059 Casali del Manco – Loc. Casole Bruzio (CS)
Tel. (0984)432617, 438325 - Fax (0984)432617
www.aztec.it [email protected]
269

Aztec Api++ Manuel in English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aztec Api++ Manuel in English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aztec Api++ Manuel in English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Machine Translated by Google

Plateaus, plinths, gratings

API++ FULL - Plates, plinths and grates

Copyright © 2000, 2023 Aztec Informatica srl

technical documentation or information contained therein. The documentation could

WINDOWS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation

1 Premise ................................................. .................................................. ........................ 1

3 API program working environment................................................................ ................................ 5

Aztec Informatica srl

API++ FULL - Plates, plinths and grates

7.2 Plate ................................................ .................................................. ........................ 36

8 Graphic input ................................................ .................................................. ................. 50

8.14 Grid and snap definition................................................................ ................................................ 63

9 Loads Menu................................................................ .................................................. ................... 64

9.10 Combination details................................................................ .................................................. .. 81

12 Model Graphics ................................................ .................................................. .............. 97 12.1 Menu and command

13.1 Lift options ................................................................ .................................................. ....... 101 13.1.1 Calculation

Aztec Informatica srl

API++ FULL - Plates, plinths and grates

13.4 Interaction analysis options ................................................ ........................................... 107 13.5 Settlement

14 Armor Menu................................................................. .................................................. ............. 117 14.1 Plate

15.1 Global results................................................................ .................................................. .......... 125 Overall

results......... .................................................. .................................................. ... 134 15.6.1 Geotechnical

results................................................ .................................................. ....... 139 15.9 Constraint

results ................................. .................................................. ............ 142

16 Results graphics................................................. .................................................. ............. 144

16.4 Pop-up menu................................................. .................................................. ............... 145 The visible menu

query................................................. .................................................. .. 158

16.12 Viewing beam stresses ................................................................ ................................ 159 16.12.1 Detail of

options................................................................ ................................................ 176 16.19 Odds

18 Report Menu ................................................. .................................................. ............ 179 18.1 Generate

19 Window Menu ................................................. .................................................. ............... 181

20 Help Menu ................................................. .................................................. .................... 181

21 Finite element method................................................................ ............................................. 183 21.1 Bilinear

22 The beam element............................................. .................................................. ............. 202 22.1 Stiffness matrix -

23.1 Structured triangular mesh generator................................................................ ...................... 209

Aztec Informatica srl

API++ FULL - Plates, plinths and grates

generator................................................. .................................................. .. 213

24 Modeling the foundation plate................................................................ ................... 215 24.1 The interaction

25 Calculation of voltages ................................................ .................................................. ... 220 25.1 Boussinesq

theory .......................................... .................................................. ..... 220 25.2 Frohlich

theory ................................ .................................................. ............. 221

26 Calculation of settlements ................................................ .................................................. ... 223

27 Limit load of shallow foundations ................................................. ................................ 226 27.1 Terzaghi

29 Calculation and arrangement of reinforcement................................................................ ............................ 252 29.1

30 Reinforcement calculation and section verification ................................................................ ................ 257

31 Bibliography................................................. .................................................. .................. 266 31.1 Mesh

31.2 Finite Element Method................................................................ .......................................... 266

31.3 General ................................................ .................................................. ................. 267

Aztec Informatica srl

API++ FULL - Plates, plinths and grates

elevated gratings. It is a comprehensive program developed

both vertical and horizontal in any position.

punctual and scheduled.

function of the entities inserted (loads, constraints, piles).

window, selection by polyline, querying of nodes and elements, etc.

the finite element method.

The ground is considered as a series of horizontal springs with elastoplastic behavior